advertisement
9CAP / 9CAF / 9CHP / 9CHF
9 채널 무선조종 시스템
사 용 설 명 서
이 문서에대한 원본문서의 권리는 "후타바"에 있으며, 번역된 문서의 권리는 황재필( [email protected], [email protected]
)이 가지며 어떠한 상업적인 사용을 금합니다.
Entire Contents © Copyright 2002 FUTZ8585 V1.2
목 차
소개 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
추가적인 기술적 도움,지원 및 써비스 . . . . .3
응용 , 수출 및 수정 . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
특별한 마킹의 의미는?
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
안전에관한 사전경고 (읽지않고 사용치 마세요.) . .5
9C 에대한 소개 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
내용물과 기술적 규격 . . . . . . . . . . . .9
악세사리들 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
조종기 제어 &
Switch 인지/지정 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Ni-Cd 배터리 충전하기. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
스틱 조정하기 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
화면의 명암비 조절하기 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
조종기 모드 변경하기 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Radio 설치및 통달거리 체크하기 . . . . . . . . . . . .16
비행 주파수들 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
조종기 화면과 버튼들 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
경고 및 에러메세지 표시 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
비행기
&
(
Servo
ACRO) 기능들 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
기능들의 Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
4채널 비행기를 세팅하기위한 빠른 가이드
PARAMETER Submenu: TYPE, MODUL, ATL, AIL2,
Idle Management:
Dual/Triple Rates and Exponential (
. . . .22
ACRO BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
MODEL Submenu: MODEL SELECT, COPY and NAME . .25
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
END POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
IDLE DOWN and THR-CUT . . . . . . . .33
D/R,EXP) . . . . . .35
TIMER Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Auxiliary Channel assignments and
CH9 reverse (
AUX-CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
TRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
TRIM and SUB-TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
SERVO Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe (
F/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Other Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
GLIDER (
GLID1FLP/2FLP) FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . .65
Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Getting Started with a Basic 4-CH Glider . . . . . . . . .66
GLIDER-SPECIFIC
BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS . .68
Model type (
PARAMETERS submenu) . . . . . . . . . .68
GLIDER-SPECIFIC
ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS 69
BUTTERFLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
FLAP-AILE (GLID2FLP only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
AILE-FLAP (GLID2FLP only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
START OFS (Launch/Start Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
SPEED OFS (Minimum Drag Setup) . . . . . . . . . . .71
헬리콥터 (SW…) 기능들 . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
헬리콥터를 위한 목차와 참조정보.....
.........73
기본적인 헬리콥터로 설정시작하기 . . . . . . . . . .74
HELI-SPECIFIC
BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . .77
MODEL TYPE (PARAMETERS submenu) . . . . . . . . . .77
SWASH AFR (swashplate surface direction and travel
correction) (not in
SWH1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Setting up the Normal Flight Condition . . . . . . .81
THR-CUT (specialized settings for helicopter specific
models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
HELI-SPECIFIC
ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS . . .83
THROTTLE HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE and REVO. . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Idle-ups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Trims/offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Hovering setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Gyros and governors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Note that in the text of this manual, beginning at this point, any time we are using a feature’s specialized name or abbreviation, as seen on the screen of the 9C, that name, feature, or abbreviation will be exactly as seen on the radio’s screen, including capitalization and shown in a
DIFFERENT
TYPE STYLE for clarity. Any time we mention a specific
control on the radio itself, such as moving S
WITCH
A, K
NOB
VR(B), or the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
, those words will be displayed as they are here.
ACRO ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Wing types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
FLAPERON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
FLAP TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Aileron Differential (
AIL-DIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Using a 5-channel receiver:
AIL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
ELEVON (see tail types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Tail types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
ELEVON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Twin Elevator Servos (
AILEVATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . .49
V-TAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
SNAP ROLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Mixes: definitions and types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
ELEV-FLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
AIRBRAKE/BUTTERFLY (crow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
THROTTLE-NEEDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
THROTTLE DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Linear,
Prog. mixes 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Curve,
Prog. mixes 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
2
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for purchasing a Futaba
®
9C series digital proportional R/C system. This system is extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make the best use of your system and to fly safely, please read this manual carefully. If you have any difficulties while using your system, please consult the manual, our online Frequently
Asked Questions (on the web pages referenced below), your hobby dealer, or the Futaba Service Center.
Owner’s Manual and Additional Technical Help
This manual has been carefully written to be as helpful to you, the new owner, as possible. There are many pages of setup procedures and examples. However, it need not be your sole resource of setup guidelines for your 9C. For example, pages
22-24 include setup instructions for a basic 4-channel airplane. The Frequently Asked Questions web page referenced below includes this type of step-by-step setup instructions for a variety of other model types, including multi-engine, complex gear installation, 7-servo aerobatic models, 140 degree CCPM, etc.
Due to unforeseen changes in production procedures, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice.
Support and Service: It is recommended to have your Futaba equipment serviced annually during your hobby’s “off season” to ensure safe operation.
IN NORTH AMERICA
Please feel free to contact the Futaba Service Center for assistance in operation, use and programming. Please be sure to regularly visit the 9C Frequently Asked Questions web site at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html. This page includes extensive programming, use, set up and safety information on the 9C radio system and is updated regularly. Any technical updates and US manual corrections will be available on this web page. If you do not find the answers to your questions there, please see the end of our F.A.Q. area for information on contacting us via email for the most rapid and convenient response.
Don’t have Internet access? Internet access is available at no charge at most public libraries, schools, and other public resources. We find internet support to be a fabulous reference for many modelers as items can be printed and saved for future reference, and can be accessed at any hour of the day, night, weekend or holiday. If you do not wish to access the internet for information, however, don’t worry. Our support teams are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central time to assist you.
FOR SERVICE ONLY:
Futaba Service Center
1610 Interstate Drive
Champaign IL 61822 www.hobbyservices.com
FOR SUPPORT :
(PROGRAMMING AND USER QUESTIONS)
Please start here for answers to most questions:
www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html
FACSIMILE: 217-398-7721
PHONE: 217-398-8970 option 4
OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA
Please contact your Futaba importer in your region of the world to assist you with any questions, problems or service needs.
Please recognize that all information in this manual, and all support availability, is based upon the systems sold in North
America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region’s support center for assistance.
3
Application, Export, and Modification
1. This product may be used for model airplane or surface (boat, car, robot) use, if on the correct frequency. It is not intended for use in any application other than the control of models for hobby and recreational purposes. The product is subject to regulations of the Ministry of Radio/Telecommunications and is restricted under Japanese law to such purposes.
2. Exportation precautions:
(a) When this product is exported from the country of manufacture, its use is to be approved by the laws governing the country of destination which govern devices that emit radio frequencies. If this product is then re-exported to other countries, it may be subject to restrictions on such export. Prior approval of the appropriate government authorities may be required. If you have purchased this product from an exporter outside your country, and not the authorized Futaba distributor in your country, please contact the seller immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met.
(b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations, and an application for export approval must be submitted. In the US, use of 72MHz (aircraft only), 75MHz (ground models only) and 27MHz
(both) frequency bands are strictly regulated by the FCC. This equipment must not be utilized to operate equipment other than radio controlled models. Similarly, other frequencies (except 50MHz, for HAM operators) must not be used to operate models.
3. Modification, adjustment, and replacement of parts: Futaba is not responsible for unauthorized modification, adjustment, and replacement of parts on this product. Any such changes may void the warranty.
The Following Statement Applies to the Receiver (for U.S.A.)
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesirable operation.
(for USA)
The RBRC
™
SEAL on the nickel-cadmium battery contained in Futaba products indicates that Futaba
Corporation of America is voluntarily participating in an industry-wide program to collect and recycle these batteries at the end of their useful lives, when taken out of service within the United States. The RBRC
™ program provides a convenient alternative to placing used nickel-cadmium batteries into the trash or municipal waste system, which is illegal in some areas.
You may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery. Please call
1-800-8-BATTERY for information on Ni-Cd battery recycling in your area. Futaba Corporation of America’s involvement in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment and conserving natural resources.
NOTE: Our instruction manuals encourage our customers to return spent batteries to a local recycling center in order to keep a healthy environment.
RBRC is a trademark of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation.
4
Meaning of Special Markings
Pay special attention to safety where indicated by the following marks:
DANGER - Procedures which may lead to dangerous conditions and cause death/serious injury if not carried out properly.
WARNING - Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition or cause death or serious injury to the user if not carried out properly, or procedures where the probability of superficial injury or physical damage is high.
CAUTION - Procedures where the possibility of serious injury to the user is small, but there is a danger of injury, or physical damage, if not carried out properly.
= Prohibited = Mandatory
Warning: Always keep electrical components away from small children.
FLYING SAFETY
To ensure the safety of yourself and others, please observe the following precautions:
Have regular maintenance performed. Although your 9C protects the model memories with non-volatile EEPROM memory (which does not require periodic replacement) and not a battery, it still should have regular checkups for wear and tear. We recommend sending your system to the Futaba Service Center annually during your non-flying-season for a complete checkup and service.
Ni-Cd Battery
Charge the batteries! (See Charging the Ni-Cd batteries, p. 14, for details.) Always recharge the transmitter and receiver batteries for at least 8 hours before each flying session. A low battery will soon die, causing loss of control and a crash. When you begin your flying session, reset your 9C’s built-in timer, and during the session pay attention to the duration of usage.
Stop flying long before your batteries become low on charge. Do not rely on your radio’s low battery warning systems, intended only as a precaution, to tell you when to recharge. Always check your transmitter and receiver batteries prior to each flight.
Where to Fly
We recommend that you fly at a recognized model airplane flying field. You can find model clubs and fields by asking your nearest hobby dealer, or in the US by contacting the Academy of Model Aeronautics.
You can also contact the national Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA), which has more than 2,500 chartered clubs across the country. Through any one of them, instructor training programs and insured newcomer training are available. Contact the AMA at the address or toll-free phone number below.
5
Academy of Model Aeronautics
5151 East Memorial Drive
Muncie, IN 47302-9252
Tele. (800) 435-9262
Fax (765) 741-0057 or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org
Always pay particular attention to the flying field’s rules, as well as the presence and location of spectators, the wind direction, and any obstacles on the field. Be very careful flying in areas near power lines, tall buildings, or communication facilities as there may be radio interference in their vicinity.
If you must fly away from a club field, be sure there are no other modelers flying within a three-to-five-mile range, or you may lose control of your aircraft or cause someone else to lose control.
At the flying field
Before flying, be sure that the frequency you intend to fly with is not in use, and secure any frequency control device (pin, tag, etc.) for that frequency before turning on your transmitter. It is never possible to fly two or more
models on the same frequency at the same time. Even though there are different types of modulation (AM, FM,
PCM), only one model may be flown on a single frequency at any one time.
To prevent possible damage to your radio gear, turn the power switches on and off in the proper sequence:
1. Pull throttle stick to idle position, or otherwise disarm your motor/engine.
2. Turn on the transmitter power and allow your transmitter to reach its home screen.
3. Confirm the proper model memory has been selected.
4. Fully extend the transmitter antenna.
5. Turn on your receiver power.
6. Test all controls. If a servo operates abnormally, don’t attempt to fly until you determine the cause of the problem.
(For PCM systems only: Test to ensure that the FailSafe settings are correct by waiting at least 2 minutes after adjusting then, turning the transmitter off and confirming the proper surface/throttle movements. Turn the transmitter back on.)
7. Start your engine.
8. Complete a full range check (see p. 17).
9. After flying, bring your throttle stick to idle position, engage any kill switches or otherwise disarm your motor/engine.
10. Turn off receiver power.
11. Turn off transmitter power.
If you do not turn on your system in this order, you may damage your servos or control surfaces, flood your engine, or in the case of electric-powered or gasoline-powered models, the engine may unexpectedly turn on and cause a severe injury.
While you are getting ready to fly, if you place your transmitter on the ground, be sure that the wind won’t tip
it over. If it is knocked over, the throttle stick may be accidentally moved, causing the engine to speed up. Also, damage to your transmitter may occur.
Before taxiing, be sure to extend the transmitter antenna to its full length.
A collapsed antenna will reduce your flying range and cause a loss of control. It is a good idea to avoid pointing the transmitter antenna directly at the model, since the signal is weakest in that direction.
Don’t fly in the rain! Water or moisture may enter the transmitter through the antenna or stick openings and cause erratic operation or loss of control. If you must fly in wet weather during a contest, be sure to cover your transmitter with a plastic bag or waterproof barrier. Never fly if lightning is expected.
6
A QUICK INTRODUCTION TO THE 9C SYSTEM
Note that in the text of this manual, beginning at this point, any time we are using a feature’s specialized name or abbreviation as seen on the screen of the 9C, that name, feature, or abbreviation will be exactly as seen on the radio’s screen, including capitalization and shown in a
DIFFERENT TYPE STYLE for clarity. Any time we mention a specific control on the radio itself,
such as moving S
WITCH
A, K
NOB
VR(B), or the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
, those words will be displayed as they are here.
TRANSMITTER:
•
Large graphic liquid-crystal display panel with 4 buttons and an easy set up turn-and-press Dial for quick, easy setup.
•
All transmitters include all 3 aircraft types with specialized programming for each, including:
•
Airplane (
ACRO)
•
V-tail
•
ELEVON
AIRBRAKE
•
•
Twin Aileron Servos ( FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF)
Twin Elevator Servos ( AILEVATOR)
Snap Roll (4 separate directions available)
•
Helicopter (5 swashplate types, including CCPM, see page 77)( HELI)
•
3 Idle Ups
•
Revo. Mixing
Delay
•
•
Throttle and Pitch Curves per Condition
Gyro Mixing including Separate Settings per Condition
Governor Mixing
•
Sailplane/Glider (2 wing types)( GLID)
•
V-tail
•
ELEVON
START OFFSET
•
•
Twin Ailerons (
Crow ( BUTTERFLY)
SPEED OFFSET
FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF)
•
BASIC menu for quick, easy set up of less complex models.
•
ADVANCE menu for more complex, unique setups.
•
Four electronic T
RIM
L
EVERS
for rapid yet precise trim adjustment - no remembering to “store trims” between models and no more “bumped trims” during transport.
•
IDLE- DOWN (ACRO) and THR-CUT (ACRO/HELI) (engine shut off) setups to allow precise engine control for taxi and landings.
•
8 complete model memories with 6 more per optional CAMPac.
•
New stick design with improved feel, adjustable length and tension.
•
Triple rates available by setting dual rates to 3-position switches.
•
Eight S
WITCHES
, 3 D
IALS
and 2 S
LIDERS
; completely assignable in most applications.
•
Trainer system includes the “functional” (
FUNC) setting, which allows the student to use the 9C’s mixing, helicopter, and other programming functions even with a 4-channel buddy box. (Optional trainer cord required.)
•
Transmits in both FM ( PPM) and PCM by selecting modulation/cycling transmitter. Requires receiver of proper modulation.
•
Permanent memory storage via EEPROM with no backup battery to service or have fail.
•
9CA transmitter features airplane friendly switch layout, with the trainer switch at the left hand, and a notched throttle to minimize throttle changes with rudder input. Defaults to ACRO MODEL TYPE.
•
9CH transmitter features helicopter-friendly switch layout, with idle-up and throttle hold switches at the left hand, and a smooth, ratchet-less (unsprung) throttle for perfect hovering. Defaults to HELI(SW1) MODEL TYPE.
•
Change transmitter mode from mode 2 to modes 1, 3, or 4. (See P. 15)
7
MODULE: 72TP-FM
•
Module may be easily removed and a module on a different channel (or even band) reinserted to change the frequency on which the 9C transmits.
•
Module transmits both FM ( PPM) and PCM. No need for a second module.
•
All transmission circuitry is included in the module, so no retuning is needed when changing channels or even bands.
•
Frequency band is changed by inserting a module on the proper band, including for international or ground model use.
•
In North America it is against FCC regulation to change the crystal within the transmitter module to a different channel. All such transmitter crystal changes must be performed by a certified radio technician. Failure to properly tune a system to its new channel may result in decreased range and may also result in interference to other types of frequency users on adjoining channels. Doing so also voids your AMA insurance.
•
The FSS synthesized module for the 9Z family of radios is NOT compatible with the 9C.
•
Radio system beeps and RF
LIGHT
goes out to indicate module is not installed and radio is not transmitting.
•
Non-Futaba brand modules are not FCC certified for use with this radio and therefore are against FCC regulation to use.
Doing so also voids your AMA insurance.
•
TJ75FM modules may also be used with the 9C for ground use models such as robotics, rocketry, trains, cars, and boats.
RECEIVER: R138/R148/R149
•
The R138 or R148 FM 8-channel or the R149 PCM 9-channel receiver included with your system is a high-sensitivity narrow-band dual-conversion receiver.
•
Note that your 9C transmitter is capable of transmission on both PPM (FM) and PCM with just a simple programming change and just turning the transmitter off and back on. (See p. 28.)
•
Any Futaba narrow band FM receiver (all produced after 1991) on the correct frequency band and frequency may be used with the 9C.
•
Any Futaba PCM 1024 receiver on the right frequency band and frequency may be used with the 9C (all 1024 receivers say PCM1024; receivers which say PCM but not 1024 are 512 resolution and not compatible).
NEVER attempt to change a receiver’s band by simply changing crystal (IE removing a 72MHz crystal and inserting a 75MHz crystal). A receiver that has a crystal installed from a different frequency band without retuning will not receive properly and will have dramatically decreased range.
•
In North America the receiver included with this system may have its frequency changed by simply changing the crystal as long as it remains in the same half the band. A low band receiver between channels 11 and 35 may be changed to any other channel between 11 and 35 without requiring any tuning. A high band receiver between channels 36 and 60 may similarly be changed. Receivers being changed from a high band channel to a low band or vice versa require proper tuning and service by the Futaba Service Center.
SERVOS
• Please see technical specifications page for specifics on the servos included with your system.
• The included receiver is compatible with all J-plug Futaba servos, including retract, winch, and digital servos.
8
CONTENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice.)
Your 9CAP or 9CHP (packaged with a 9-channel PCM receiver), 9CAF or 9CHF (packaged with an 8-channel FM receiver) system includes the following components:
•
9C Transmitter, including RF module
1
(TP)
R148DF Receiver or R149DP Receiver
•
Servos, S3004, S3001 or S9001, with mounting hardware and servo arm assortment
•
Switch harness
•
Aileron extension cord
•
110V wall charger (North America)
•
Frequency Flag
Servo S9001 (Coreless motor)
Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral
Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V (from receiver)
Output torque: 54.2 oz-in(3.9 kg-cm) at 4.8V
Operating speed: 0.22 sec/60 at 4.8V
Size: 1.59 x 0.78 x 1.41 (40.4 x 19.8 x 36 mm)
Weight: 1.69 oz (48 g)
Transmitter T9C
Operating system: 2-stick, 9 channels, PCM1024 system
Transmitting frequency: 50, 72 or 75 MHz bands
Modulation: FM/PPM or PCM, switchable
Power supply: 9.6V NT8S600B Ni-Cd battery
Current drain: 280 mA
Servo S3001 (Standard, ball-bearing)
Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral
Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V (from receiver)
Output torque: 41.7 oz-in (3.0 kg-cm)
Operating speed: 0.22 sec/60
Size: 1.59 x 0.78 x 1.41 (40.4 x 19.8 x 36 mm)
Weight: 1.59 oz (45.1g)
Receiver R149DP
(PCM Dual conversion)
Receiving frequency: 50 or 72 MHz bands
Intermediate freq.: 10.7 MHz & 455 kHz
Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V Ni-Cd battery
Current drain: 14 mA
Size: 1.28 x 2.17 x 0.82 (32.6 x 55.0 x 20.8 mm)
Weight: 1.22 oz (34.5 g)
Channels: 9
Receiver R148DF
(FM Dual conversion)
Receiving frequency: 50 or 72 MHz bands
Intermediate freq.: 10.7MHz & 455 kHz
Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V Ni-Cd battery
Current drain: 14 mA
Size: 1” x 2.2” x .9” (25.4 x 55.8 x 22.9 mm)
Weight: 1.1 oz (31.18 g)
Channels: 8
Servo S3004 (Standard, ball-bearing)
Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral
Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V (from receiver)
Output torque: 44.4 oz-in (3.2 kg-cm)
Operating speed: 0.23 sec/60
Size: 1.59 x 0.78 x 1.41” (40.4 x 19.8 x 36 mm)
Weight: 1.30 oz (38 g)
1
Transmitter band may only be changed by changing the module. Contact
Futaba Service Center regarding adjustability of receiver band. Band
cannot be changed by simply changing crystals.
9
The following additional accessories are available from your dealer. Refer to a Futaba catalog for more information:
•
CAMPac Memory module - the optional DP-16K CAMPac increases your model storage capability (to 14 models from
8) and allows you to transfer programs to another 9C transmitter. Note that data cannot be transferred to/from any other model of transmitter (i.e. 8U, 9Z, etc).
Insertion of a CAMPac containing data of a different transmitter type (ex: 9Z) will result in a complete
CAMPac data reset and loss of all data.
•
NT8S Transmitter battery pack - the (600mAh) transmitter Ni-Cd battery pack may be easily exchanged with a fresh one to provide enough capacity for extended flying sessions.
•
Trainer cord - the optional training cord may be used to help a beginning pilot learn to fly easily by placing the instructor on a separate transmitter. Note that the 9C transmitter may be connected to another 9C system, as well as to many other models of Futaba transmitters. The 9C transmitter uses the newer rectangular type cord plug. Both new-to-new and new-to-round plug style trainer cords are available.
•
FTA8 Neckstrap - a neckstrap may be connected to your T9C system to make it easier to handle and improve your flying precision, since your hands won’t need to support the transmitter’s weight.
•
Y-harnesses, servo extensions, etc - Genuine Futaba extensions and Y-harnesses, including a heavy-duty version with heavier wire, are available to aid in your larger model and other installations.
•
5-cell (6.0V) receiver battery packs - All Futaba airborne equipment (except that which is specifically labeled otherwise) is designed to work with 4.8V (Ni-Cd 4 cells) or 6.0V (Ni-Cd 5 cells or alkaline 4 cells). Using a 6.0V pack increases the current flow to the servos, which accelerates their rate of response and their torque. However, because of this faster current draw, a 5cell battery pack of the same mAh rating will last approximately ¾ the time of a 4-cell pack.
•
R309DPS - Synthesized receiver which can be changed to any 72MHz frequency with the turn of 2 dials, no tuning needed.
•
Gyros - a variety of genuine Futaba gyros are available for your aircraft or helicopter needs. See p. 64 for aircraft or p. 89 for helicopter gyro information.
•
Governor (GV1) - for helicopter use. Automatically adjusts throttle servo position to maintain a constant head speed regardless of blade pitch, load, weather, etc. See p. 89 for details.
•
DSC Cord - allows setup and testing without transmitting. Requires DSC compatible receiver (R149DP or R309DPS) and DSC cord. With Transmitter and Receiver off, plug cord into trainer port then, into receiver battery slot. All programing and setup may be done in this manner without transmitting.
•
TP72FM modules - additional modules on other frequencies within the 50MHz (licensed operators only) and 72 MHz bands may be purchased to utilize your transmitter with receivers on other frequencies. Additionally, the TK and
TJ75MHz modules may be used with the 9C. (See p.8)
•
Receivers - various models of receivers may be purchased for use in other models. (See p. 8.)
10
조종기 제어키
– 비행기
먼지덮개
(옵션인 CAMPac모듈이 이곳에 꼽힌다.)
VR(A)
Flap Trim Control
VR(B)
CH8 Knob
This controls CH6, and if flaperon mixing is activated controls the flap.
SW(B)
Rudder Dual Rate Switch
SW(A)
Elevator Dual Rate
Switch
SW(F)
Snap Roll or
Trainer Switch
SW(E)
Landing Gear
Switch
/CH5
VR(D)
Rudder
/Elevator
Stick
Power
LED*
Elevator
Trim Lever
Rudder
Trim Lever
안 테 나
안테나를 뽑거나 접을때 휘지 않도록 조심하라.
비행시 안테나는 반드시 최대로 뽑아서 사용하라.
휴대용 손잡이
VR(C)
Spoiler/CH7 Control
This knob is disabled if aileron differential is activated.
SW(C)
Elevator - Flap Mixing or
Airbrake Mixing Switch
SW(D)
Aileron Dual Rate Switch
SW(H)
SW(G)
VR(E)
Throttle
/Aileron
Stick
RF
LED**
Throttle
Trim Lever
Aileron Trim Lever
다이얼
Edit Keys Edit keys
후 크
(옵션인 목줄)
LCD 창
전원스위 치
(ON시 )
이 그림은 공장출하시 적용된 Mode 1 System 에대한 디폴트 Switch할당을 보여주는 것이다.
많은 스위치들의 위치와 기능은 쎗팅메뉴를 통해서 바꿀수 있다.(예: aileron dual rate를
Switch C의 triple rate로 옮김. 자세한 내용은 p.35를 보라.)
* 만약 믹스 스위치들이 동작되면 이를 알리기위해 Power LED가 깜빡인다.
** 무선 송신링크가 안정적이고 적절히 전송되어지고 있다면 RF LED는 초록색으로 나타난다.
11
조종기 제어키
– 헬리콥터
먼지덮개
(옵션인 CAMPac모듈이 이곳에 꼽힌다.)
VR(A)
Hovering - Pitch Knob
VR(B)
CH8 Knob
SW(B)
Rudder Dual Rate Switch
SW(A)
Elevator Dual Rate
Switch
SW(F)
Idle-up 3 Switch
SW(E)
Idle-up 1&2
Switch
VR(D)
Elevator/
Rudder Stick
Power
LED*
Elevator
Trim Lever
안테나
안테나를 뽑거나 접을때 휘지 않도록 조심하라.
비행시 안테나는 반드시 최대로 뽑아서 사용하라.
휴대용 손잡이
VR(C)
Hovering - Throttle Knob
SW(C)
CH 7/Governor Switch
SW(D)
Aileron Dual Rate Switch
Trainer Switch
SW(H)
SW(G)
Throttle - Hold Switch
VR(E)
Throttle
/Aileron
Stick
RF
LED**
Throttle
Trim Lever
Aileron Trim Lever
Rudder
Trim Lever
다이얼
Edit Keys Edit keys
후크
(옵션 목줄)
LCD 창
전 원 스 위 치
(ON시 위쪽으로)
이 그림은 공장출하시 적용된 Mode 1 System 에대한 디폴트 Switch할당을 보여주는 것이다.
많은 스위치들의 위치와 기능은 쎗팅메뉴를 통해서 바꿀수 있다.(예: aileron dual rate를
Switch C의 triple rate로 옮김. 자세한 내용은 p.35를 보라.)
* 만약 믹스 스위치들이 동작되면 이를 알리기위해 Power LED가 깜빡인다.
** 무선 송신링크가 안정적이고 적절히 전송되어지고 있다면 RF LED는 초록색으로 나타난다.
12
To remove, press the tabs together and gently pull rearwards.
To install, line up the connector pins with the socket in the rear of the module and gently snap into position.
RF module
Trainer function
/DSC function connector
Ni-Cd battery pack
Charging jack
PUSH
Battery connector location
Battery cover
NOTE: If you need to remove or replace the transmitter battery, do not pull on its wires to remove it. Instead, gently pull on the connector's plastic housing where it plugs into the transmitter.
SWITCH 할당표
•
The factory default functions activated by the switches and knobs for a Mode 2 transmitter are shown below.
•
Most 9C functions may be reassigned to non-default positions quickly and easily.
•
Basic control assignments of channels 5-9 are quickly adjustable in AUX-CH (see pp. 39). For example, the channel 5 servo, which defaults to S
WITCH
E for retract use, can easily be unassigned ( NULL) to allow for easy use as a second rudder servo in a mix, or to a slider or dial for bomb door or other control.
•
Note that most functions need to be activated in the programming to operate.
•
Mode 1 transmitter functions are similar but reverse certain switch commands. Always check that you have the desired switch assignment for each function during set up.
Switch/Knob
A or H Tx.
S
S
S
K
K
K
WITCH
WITCH
WITCH
WITCH
NOB
NOB
NOB
A
B
C
A
Switch B
Switch C
S D
Switch E
Switch F
G
H
S
LIDER
D
S
LIDER
E
OR
OF
OR
OR
G*
H*
E*
F*
Airplane (
ACRO) elevator dual rate rudder dual rate up = ELE-FLP on center/down =
IDLE-DOWN down =
AIRBRAKE on aileron dual rate landing gear/ch 5 snap roll/trainer none none flap/ch 6
(flap trim if FLAPERON on) ch 8 spoiler/ch 7
(disabled if AIL-DIFF on) none none
Sailplane/Glider (
elevator dual rate down = butterfly on rudder dual rate up = ELE-FLP on center/down =
IDLE-DOWN aileron dual rate
GLID1FLP = gear trainer back =
SPEED OFFSET fwd =
START OFFSET none
GLID1FLP: flap
(flap trim if FLAPERON on)
GLID2FLP: camber
(flap trim if
FL-AIL off) ch 8 spoiler/ch 7
(disabled if AIL-DIF on)
GLID1FLP: ch 5 none
GLID)
Helicopter (
HELI) elevator dual rate rudder dual rate governor/ch 7 aileron dual rate throttle hold trainer /THR-CUT idle-up 1 and 2 idle-up3/ch 5/gyro
HOVERING PITCH ch 8
HOVERING THROTTLE none none
*On the 9CH transmitters, the T
OP
L
EFT
S
WITCHES
are spring-loaded and 3-position; on the 9CA, those switches are on the right side. For consistency, the switch position’s designation remains the same (upper left is F, etc), but the functions are moved to match the switch type.
13
수신기와 써보의 연결
수
비행기(AACCRRO
출력과
채널 글 (G
1
2
3
4
5 ailerons/right aileron elevator throttle rudder
1
/combined right flap & aileron
1 spare/landing gear/left aileron
1,3
/combined left flap and aileron
2,3 right flap (
GLD2FLP) aileron (cyclic roll) elevator (cyclic pitch) throttle rudder spare/gyro
6 spare/ flap(s)/combined left flap and aileron
2 pitch (collective pitch)
7 spare/left aileron
1 spare/governor
8 spare/second elevator servo
4
/mixture control spare
9 spare spare
1
Aileron Differential mode ( AIL-DIFF). (See p. 47).
2
Flaperon mode. (See p. 45).
3
Using Second Aileron option, second aileron servo output is sent to channels 5 and 6 to allow use of a 5-channel receiver.
(
AIL-2) (See p. 47)
4
AILEVATOR (dual elevator) mode. (See p. 49).
CHARGING THE Ni-Cd BATTERIES
Charging Your System’s Batteries
1. Connect the transmitter charging jack and airborne Ni-Cd batteries to the transmitter and receiver connectors of the charger.
2. Plug the charger into a wall socket.
3. Check that the charger LED lights.
Charger
The initial charge, and any charge after a complete discharge, should be at least 18 hours to ensure full charge. The batteries should be left on charge for about 15 hours when recharging the standard NR-4J, NR4F1500 and NT8S600B Ni-Cd batteries.
TX: Transmitter charging indicator
RX: Receiver charging indicator
To transmitter charging jack
Receiver Ni-Cd battery
We recommend charging the batteries with the charger
supplied with your system. Note that the use of a fast charger may damage the batteries by overheating and dramatically reduce their lifetime.
You should fully discharge your system’s Ni-Cd batteries periodically to prevent a condition called memory. For example, if you only make two flights each session, or you regularly use only a small amount of the batteries capacity, the memory effect can reduce the actual capacity even if the battery is fully charged. You can cycle your batteries with a commercial cycling unit*, or by leaving the system on and exercising the servos by moving the transmitter sticks until the transmitter shuts itself off. Cycling should be done every four to eight weeks, even during the winter or periods of long storage. Keep track of the batteries capacity during cycling; if there is a noticeable change, you may need to replace the batteries.
*Note that the 9C transmitter system has electronic protection from overcharging and reverse polarity via a poli-switch.
It does NOT have a diode in the charge circuit and may be discharged/peak charged with the battery in the transmitter.
DO NOT attempt to charge your 8-cell transmitter pack on the 4-cell receiver plug of the wall charger!
14
Adjusting the length of the non-slip control sticks
Stick tip A Locking piece B
You may change the length of the control sticks to make your transmitter more comfortable to hold and operate. To lengthen or shorten your transmitter’s sticks, first unlock the stick tip by holding locking piece B and turning stick tip A counterclockwise. Next, move the locking piece B up or down (to lengthen or shorten). When the length feels comfortable, lock the position by turning locking piece B counterclockwise.
Stick lever tension adjustment
Aileron
Elevator
Stick Stick
Rudder
Mode 2 transmitter with rear cover removed.
You may adjust the tension of your sticks to provide the feel that you prefer for flying. To adjust your springs, you’ll have to remove the rear case of the transmitter. First, remove the battery cover on the rear of the transmitter. Next, unplug the battery wire, and remove the battery and RF module from the transmitter. While you are removing the RF module, pay attention to the location of the pins that plug into the back of the module. Next, using a screwdriver, remove the four screws that hold the transmitter’s rear cover in position, and put them in a safe place. Gently ease off the transmitter’s rear cover.
Now you’ll see the view shown in the figure above.
Using a small Phillips screwdriver, rotate the adjusting screw for each stick for the desired spring tension. The tension increases when the adjusting screw is turned clockwise.
When you are satisfied with the spring tensions, reattach the transmitter's rear cover. Check that the upper printed circuit board is on its locating pins, then very carefully reinstall the rear cover being mindful to guide the RF module connector pins through the slot in the case. When the cover is properly in place, reinstall and tighten the four screws. Reinstall the battery, cover and module.
Adjusting Display Contrast
To adjust the display contrast, from the home menu press and hold the End button.
Turn the dial while still holding the menu button: clockwise to brighten counterclockwise to darken the display
Let go of the dial and the button.
To reset to default, Hold the
END key and press and hold the Dial.
Changing Modes:
Hold down the Mode and End buttons while turning on the Transmitter. The screen reads "STK-MODE". Change this to the correct mode. Note that this will NOT change the throttle and elevator ratchets, etc. Those are mechanical changes that must be done by a service center.
15
RADIO INSTALLATION
While you are installing the battery, receiver, switch harness and servos into your model’s fuselage, please pay attention to the following guidelines:
Wood screw
Rubber grommet
Brass eyelet
Servo mount or rail
Use the supplied rubber grommets when you mount each servo. Be sure not to
over-tighten the screws. If any portion of the servo case directly contacts the fuselage or the servo rails, the rubber grommets will not dampen the vibration, which can cause mechanical wear and servo failure.
Servo Throw
Once you have installed the servos, operate each one over its full travel and check that the pushrod and output
arms do not bind or collide with each other, even at extreme trim settings. Check to see that each control linkage does not require undue force to move (if you hear a servo buzzing when there is no transmitter control motion, most likely there is too much friction in the control or pushrod). Even though the servo will tolerate loads, any unnecessary load applied to the servo arm will drain the battery pack quickly.
Switch Harness Installation
When you are ready to install the switch harness, remove the switch cover and use it as a template to cut screw holes and a rectangular hole slightly larger than the full stroke of the switch. Choose a switch location on the opposite side of the fuselage from the engine exhaust pipe, and pick a location where it can’t be inadvertently turned on or off during handling or storage. Install the switch so it moves without restriction and snaps from ON to OFF and vice versa.
Receiver Antenna
It is normal for the receiver antenna to be longer than the fuselage.
DO NOT cut or fold it back on itself — cutting or folding changes the electrical length of the antenna and may reduce range. Secure the antenna to the top of the vertical fin, and let the excess wire length trail behind. You may run the antenna inside of a non-metallic housing within the fuselage, but range may suffer if the antenna is located near metal or carbon fiber pushrods or cables. Be sure to perform a range check before flying.
Receiver Notes
When you insert servo, switch or battery connectors into the receiver, note that each plastic housing has an alignment tab. Be sure the alignment tab is oriented properly before inserting the connector. To remove a connector from the receiver, pull on the connector housing rather than the wires.
If your aileron servo (or others) are too far away to plug into the receiver, use an aileron extension cord to extend the length
of the servo lead. Additional Futaba extension cords of varying lengths are available from your hobby dealer. Always use an extension of the proper length. Avoid plugging multiple extensions together to attain your desired length. If distance is greater than
18” or multiple or high current draw servos are being used, use Futaba Heavy-Duty servo extensions.
Receiver Vibration and Waterproofing
The receiver contains precision electronic parts. Be sure to avoid vibration, shock, and temperature extremes.
For protection, wrap the receiver in foam rubber or other vibration-absorbing materials. It is also a good idea to waterproof the receiver by placing it in a plastic bag and securing the open end of the bag with a rubber band before wrapping it with foam rubber. If you accidentally get moisture or fuel inside the receiver, you may experience intermittent operation or a crash. If in doubt, send the receiver for service.
16
72 MHz band
Ch.
MHz
11 72.010
12 72.030
13 72.050
14 72.070
15 72.090
16 72.110
17 72.130
18 72.150
19 72.170
20 72.190
21 72.210
22 72.230
23 72.250
24 72.270
25 72.290
26 72.310
27 72.330
28 72.350
29 72.370
30 72.390
31 72.410
32 72.430
33 72.450
34 72.470
35 72.490
Range Testing Your R/C System
Please note that different systems demonstrate different range checks and the same system will range check differently in different conditions. Also, the receiver antenna's installation affects the range test -- exiting the top of the model is ideal.
This is a brief explanation of range test. For more in-depth specifics on receiver antenna mounting, additional checks if unsatisfactory rage is demonstrated, range checking with gasoline powered engines, etc, please see our F.A.Q. page at www.futaba-rc.com.
•
Leave the transmitter's antenna retracted and be sure both batteries are fully charged.
•
Position the aircraft away from wires, other transmitters, etc.
Test one - engine/motor off, minimum of 100 ft. range
•
Have a friend view the model but not hold it, engine off. (People conduct signals, too!)
•
Walk away from the model, working all controls constantly. Stop when the servos jitter significantly (a jitter here and there is normal), control movement stops (PCM), or you lose control altogether.
•
Measure the distance. If greater than 100 feet, great! Proceed to Test 2. Less than 100 feet of range check means you need more information to determine if your system is safe to fly. Please see our web site or call support for additional tests to perform before flying your system.
•
Repeat with friend holding the model. Note any differences.
Test two - engine/motor on
•
Repeat the test with the model's engine running and with someone holding the model. If a decrease of more than 10% is noted, research and resolve the cause of interference prior to flying your model.
What your fully operational system demonstrates is the normal range for your system in those conditions. Before every flying session, it is critical that you perform a range check. It is also required by the AMA Safety Code. If you notice a significant decrease in range with fully charged batteries, do not attempt to fly.
Aircraft (fixed wing and helicopter) Frequencies
Ch. MHz
36 72.510
37 72.530
38 72.550
39 72.570
40 72.590
41 72.610
42 72.630
43 72.650
44 72.670
45 72.690
46 72.710
47 72.730
48 72.750
49 72.770
50 72.790
51 72.810
52 72.830
53 72.850
54 72.870
55 72.890
56 72.910
57 72.930
58 72.950
59 72.970
60 72.990
50 MHz Band
(Amateur Radio Operator “HAM” license required)
Ch.
MHz Ch.
MHz
00 50.800
02
01 50.820
04 50.880 05 50.900
06 50.920
08 50.960
07 50.940
09 50.980
Installing your frequency number flag:
It is very important that you display your
transmitting channel number at all times. To install your flag, peel off the channel number’s backing sheet, and carefully stick the numbers to both sides of the number holder. Now you can snap the number holder onto the lower portion of the antenna as shown in the figure — use the clip that fits more snugly on your antenna. You may wish to cut off the other, unused clip on the other side of the flag.
17
The following frequencies and channel numbers may be used for flying aircraft in the United States:
TRANSMITTER 표시방법 & 버튼들
처음 조종기를 켰을때, "삑삑"소리가 나고, 아래와 같은 화면이 나타난다. 비핸전, 또는 심지어 엔진시동
중에 당신이 날리려고하는 모델이 화면에 표시된 model type 과 name이 맞는지 확인하라.
만일 다른
모델이 저장되어 있다면, 써보들이 아마도 리버스 될것이고, travel들과 trim들이 다를것이고, 그로인하여
날릴경우에는 즉시 추락할 것이다.
편집버튼들 과 시작화면(시스템을 처음 켰을때 나타난다.):
M
ODE
/P
AGE
B
UTTON
: (key)
프로그래밍 Menu들을 열기위해서는
M
ODE
B
UTTON
을 1초동안 누르고 있는다. 그런후,BASIC 과
ADVANCE menu사이를 이동할려면 다시한번 MODE BUTTON을 누른다.
E
ND
B
UTTON
: ( key)
전번 화면으로 돌아가기위해
END BUTTON
을 누른다. Menu로 돌아가기위해 기능들을 닫고, 시작화면으로 돌아가기위해 Menu들을 닫아라.
S
ELECT
/C
URSOR
B
UTTONS
: ( key)
스크롤하기위해 그리고 기능내를 편집하기위해 옵션을 선택하기 위해 SELECT/CURSOR BUTTON을 누른다.
BASIC 이나 ADVANCE menu내의 Page up/down을 하기위해 SELECT/CURSOR BUTTON을 누른다.
Dial돌리기:
각Menu내의 기능들 사이를 빠르게 스크롤하기위해서 시계방향 또는 시계반대방향으로
Dial을 돌린다.
기능의 옵션내의 선택사항들을 스크롤 하기위해 시계방향 또는 시계반대방향으로 Dial을 돌린다.
(예를들면, 어떤 스위치가 dual/triple rate를 사용하는지 선택하기위해...)
Dial을 누르기:
Menu에서 편집하고자 하는 실제 기능을 선택하고자 할때 Dial을 누른다.
다음과 같은 중요 판단들을 확인하기위해 1초동안 DIAL을 누르고 가만히 둔다.:메모리로부터 다른 모델을 선택하기,
하나의 모델을 다른 모델로 Copy하기, 트림 Reset, FailSafe시 채널위치를 저장하기, Model Type변경, Model Data Reset.
시스템은 당신의 선택이 확실한지를 묻어 볼 것이다. 변경을 적용키위해서 다시한번 DIAL을 다시한번 누른다.
18
경고/에러 표시들
An alarm or error indication may appear on the display of your transmitter for several reasons, including when the transmitter power switch is turned on, when the battery voltage is low, and several others. Each display has a unique sound associated with it, as described below.
MODEL SELECTION ERROR: Warning sound: 5 beeps (repeated 3 times)
The MODEL SELECTION warning is displayed when the transmitter attempts to load a model memory from a memory module
(optional CAMPac) that is not currently plugged into the transmitter. When this occurs, model No. 01 is automatically loaded.
Do not fly until the proper model is loaded into memory! Reinsert the memory module, and recall the desired setup using the model select function.
LOW BATTERY ERROR:
Warning sound: Continuous beep until transmitter is powered off.
The LOW BATTERY warning is displayed when the transmitter battery voltage drops below 8.5V.
THIS IS NOT AN “OK TO FLY” to this level! This is a warning that the radio is about to shut off.
Land your model as soon as possible before loss of control due to a dead battery.
MIXER ALERT WARNING: Warning sound: 5 Beeps (repeated until problem resolved or overridden)
The
MIXER ALERT warning is displayed to alert you whenever you turn on the transmitter with any of the mixing switches active. This warning will disappear when the offending switch or control is deactivated.
Switches for which warnings will be issued at power-up are listed below:
ACRO:Throttle cut, idle-down, snap roll, airbrake GLID:Butterfly, Start and Speed mixing HELI:Throttle cut, throttle hold, idle-up
If turning a switch OFF does not stop the mixing warning: When the warning does not stop even when the mixing switch indicated by the warning display on the screen is turned off, the functions described previously probably use the same switch and the OFF direction setting is reversed. In short, one of the mixings described above is not in the OFF state. In this case, reset the warning display by pressing both S
ELECT
B
UTTONS
simultaneously. Then change one of the switch settings of the mixings duplicated at one switch.
BACKUP ERROR: Warning sound: 4 beeps (repeated continuously)
The BACKUP ERROR warning occurs when the transmitter memory is lost for any reason. If this occurs, all of the data will be reset when the power is turned on again.
Do not fly when this message is displayed — all programming has been erased and is not available. Return your transmitter to Futaba for service.
MEMORY MODULE INITIALIZE DISPLAY
This warning appears when an (optional) CAMPac memory module is used in the transmitter for the first time. When the
M
ODE
B
UTTON
is pressed, initialization of the module begins, after which the memory module can be used. Once the module is initialized, the display will not appear again.
The 9C CANNOT convert data from other radio types (ie. 8U, 9Z). Installation of a CAMPac with data from another radio type will result in reinitialization of the CAMPac and loss of all data.
RF MODULE WARNING: Warning sound: A single long beep. The single beep lets you know that the RF module has been removed from the transmitter, or is not being read properly. The green RF light also goes out.
19
비행기
(
ACRO) MENU
기능들
모든 BASIC menu기능들은 비행기(ACRO), 글라이더(GLID1FLP/2FLP), 헬리콥터(HELISWH1/SWH2/SWH4/SR-3/SN-3)에
공통된 기능임을 명심해라. 글라이더의 BASIC menu는 IDLE-DOWN 또는 THR-CUT을 포함하지않는다;
헬리콥터의 BASIC menu는 헬리콥터편에서 다룰 추가적인 기능(swashplate조종, throttle/pitch curve들과
Normal 비행 mode용 revo)들을 포함한다.
ACRO BASIC 기능들의 전체 요약 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
4-channel 비행기 Set-up을 위한 빠른 가이드 . . . .22
ACRO BASIC MENU 기능들 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
MODEL Submenu: MODEL SELECT, COPY and NAME . .25
PARAMETER Submenu: TYPE, MODUL, ATL, AIL2,
& RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Servo REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
END POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Idle Management: IDLE DOWN and THR-CUT . . . . . . . .33
Dual/Triple Rates and Exponential ( D/R,EXP) . . . . . .35
TIMER Submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Auxiliary Channel assignments and
CH9 reverse ( AUX-CH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
TRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
TRIM and SUB-TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
SERVO Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe ( F/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
ACRO ADVANCE MENU 기능들 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Wing types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
FLAPERON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
FLAP TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Aileron Differential (
AIL-DIFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Using a 5-channel receiver:
AIL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
ELEVON (see tail types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Tail types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
ELEVON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Twin Elevator Servos (
AILEVATOR) . . . . . . . . . . . .49
V-TAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
SNAP ROLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Mixes: definitions and types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
ELEV-FLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
AIRBRAKE/BUTTERFLY (crow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
THROTTLE-NEEDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
THROTTLE DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Linear,
Prog. mixes 1-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Curve,
Prog. mixes 6-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
20
ACRO BASIC 기능들의 전체 요약
(
시 작 화 면
)
BASIC menu로 들어가지 위해서 Mode key를 1초동안 누르고 가만히 있는다.
Mode/Page
(
1 초 동 안
)
(Basic Menu 1/2)
Select
(Cursor)
End
시작화면으로 복귀하기위해 End key를
누른다.
ACRO Basic Menu
(Basic Menu 2/2)
Mode/Page
Select/Cursor를 누름으로써 각 menu상의 2개 page 화면을 page up, page down한다. 1 page이상을 가진 기능들은 우측상단구석에 "page 2개중의
1번째", "page 2개중의 2번째" 처럼 해석되는 <1/2>와 같은 표시문자를
가진다는 것을 명심하라!
Menu화면의 기능을 하이라이트하기위해 Dial을
시계방향이나 반대방향으로 돌려라.
그런다음
그 기능을 선택하기위해 Dial을 눌러라.
Mode/Page key로써 BASIC과
ADVANCE menu사이를 전환한다.
Mode/Page Select
End Selection
Cursor Down
Cursor Up
Dial Left
Dial Right
Dial Right or Left
Press Button
Switch Up
Switch at Center
Switch Down
21
Stick Up
Stick Right
Stick Down
Stick Left
Turn Knob Right
Turn Knob Left
4-channel 비행기 Set-up을 위한 빠른 가이드
This guide is intended to help you get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start on using your new radio, and to give you some ideas and direction in how to do even more than you may have already considered. It follows our basic format of all programming pages: a big picture overview of what we accomplish; a “by name” description of what we're doing to help acquaint you with the radio; then a step-by-step instruction to leave out the mystery when setting up your model.
For additional details on each function, see that function's section in this manual. The page numbers are indicated in the goals column as a convenience to you.
See p.21 for a legend of symbols used.
GOALS of EXAMPLE
Prepare your aircraft.
Name the model.
P. 25.
[Note that you do not need to do anything to "save” or store this data.
Only critical changes such as a
MODEL
RESET require additional keystrokes to
accept the change.]
STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE
Install all servos, switches, receivers per your model's instructions.
Turn on transmitter then receiver; adjust all linkages so surfaces are nearly centered.
Mechanically adjust all linkages as close as possible to proper control throws.
Check servo direction.
Make notes now of what you will need to change during programming.
Open the BASIC menu, then open the
MODEL submenu.
Turn on the transmitter.
for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE, again.) as needed to highlight MODEL.
to choose
MODEL.
Go to MODEL NAME.
to NAME.
(First character of model's name is highlighted.)
Input aircraft's name.
Close the MODEL submenu.
to change first character.
When proper character is displayed, to move to next character.
Repeat as needed.
to return to
BASIC menu.
Reverse servos as needed for proper control operation.
P. 31.
In the
BASIC menu, open (servo)
REVERSE.
Choose desired servo and reverse its direction of travel. (Ex: reversing rudder servo.)
Adjust Travels as needed to match model's recommended throws (usually listed as high rates). P. 32.
From BASIC menu, choose END POINT.
Adjust the servo's end points.
(Ex: throttle servo)
Close the function.
4 steps to REVERSE.
to choose
REVERSE.
to
CH4: RUDD.
so
REV is highlighted.
Repeat as needed.
2 steps to END POINT.
to choose
END POINT.
to
THROTTLE.
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
.
until carb barrel closes as desired.
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
.
until throttle arm just opens carb fully at full T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
.
Repeat for each channel as needed.
22
With digital trims you don’t shut the engine off with
THROTTLE TRIM
. Let's set up
IDLE-DOWN and “throttle cut” (THR-CUT) now.
GOALS of EXAMPLE
Set up
IDLE-DOWN.
P. 33.
IDLE-DOWN slows the engine's idle for landings, sitting on the runway, and maneuvers such as spins. The normal
(higher idle) setting (when
IDLE-DOWN is off) is for engine starting, taxi, and most flight maneuvers, to minimize chance of a flame-out.
THR-CUT shuts the engine off completely with the flip of a switch. P. 33.
STEPS
From the
BASIC menu, choose IDLE-DOWN.
INPUTS for EXAMPLE
5 steps to
IDLE-DOWN.
Activate and adjust IDLE-DOWN.
to choose IDLE-DOWN.
to OFF.
Optional: change switch command from
C center-and-down to any other switch.
Close the Function.
C to center position. Screen now reads
ON.
to RATE.
to increase rate until engine idles reliably but low enough to sit still.
(Not needed in this example.)
From the BASIC menu, choose THR-CUT.
(NOTE: DO NOT assign
and
THR-CUT to both positions of a 2-
position switch. See
details.)
(Note that in the middle of the left
side of the screen is the name of the channel AND the switch position you are adjusting. Two or even THREE rates may be set per channel by simply choosing the desired switch and programming percentages with the switch in each of its 2 or 3
positions.)
IDLE-DOWN
IDLE-DOWN for
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential ( D/R,EXP).
P. 38.
Activate, assign S
Close the function.
From the
D/R,EXP.
Choose the desired control, and set the first (Ex: high) rate throws and exponential.
WITCH
and adjust.
BASIC menu, choose to THR-CUT.
to choose
THR-CUT.
to OFF.
to SW.
to C.
to
POSI. to to
RATE.
C to down position.
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
.
until throttle barrel closes completely.
5 steps to D/R,EXP.
to choose D/R,EXP.
A to up position.
to CH:.
to choose CH>2 (elevator).
[note the screen reads
ELEV (UP)] to
D/R.
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
. to set desired “UP” percentage.
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
.
as needed to adjust “DOWN” percentage
(normally set the same as down.) to
EXP.
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
.
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
.
to set.
to set.
23
GOALS of EXAMPLE
Where next?
STEPS
Set the second (low) rate throws and exponential.
Optional: change dual rate switch assignment. Ex: elevator to switch G
(9CA) or E (9CH) with 3 positions.
INPUTS for EXAMPLE
A to down position.
to
D/R.
Repeat steps above to set low rate.
to SW. to
G or E to center position.
Repeat steps above to set 3rd rate.
(Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.)
TRAINER p. 40.
Multiple wing and/or tail servos: see wing types and tail types, p. 44, 48.
Elevator-to-flap, Rudder-to-aileron, flap-to-elevator, and other programmable mixes p. 53.
Retractable Gear, Flaps on a Switch, Smoke systems, kill switches, and other auxiliary channel setups. p. 39.
24
단계별 조종기설정 따라잡기.
MODEL submenu: 는 model memory를다루는 3가지 기능을 포함한다;
MODEL SELECT, MODEL COPY,
MODEL NAME .
이 기능들은 서로 연관이 되어 있고, 모든 basic 기능들이 대부분의 model에 사용되기 때문에,
이것들은
BASIC menu의 submenu내에 모여있다.
MODEL SELECT: 조종기내의 8개 model memory중(또는 옵션 CAMPac에서 추가적으로
6개 더)에서 설정이나 날리고자하는 model을 선택하는 기능이다. 철저히 하기 위해, model name과 mode type이 표시된 번호뒤에 표시된다. (각 model memory는 아마도
다른 memory들과는 다른 model type이 될 것이다.)
Model type
¥
ACRO (
비행기
)
¥
GLID (
글라이더
)
¥
HELI (
헬리콥터
)
주의: 옵션 CAMPac을 사용한다면, MODEL SELECT 와 MODEL COPY에서 CAMPac내의 model memory들인 9~14 가 추가적으로 선택될 수 있다. 당신은 model mory를 CAMPac에서
조종기로 COPY하고자할때, 우선 그 model memory가 잘 조종기에서 동작된다는 것을 확신해야 한다,.
깜박임
주의:
MODEL SELECT
기능을 통해 새model을
선택할때, 새model을 현재와 다른 modulation으로
설정하면 modulation을 변경하기위해서 반드시
Power를 껐다켜야 된다. power를 껐다켜지 않으면
주의를 환기시키기위해 초기화면에서 modulation type이 깜박인다. 이러한변경을 적용할때까지
기존 modulation type이 여전히 전송될
것이다.
GOAL: STEPS: INPUTS:
Model 3번을 선택하라.
BASIC menu를 열고, MODEL submenu를 연다.
1초동안누름.
(만약,
ADVANCE,라면 다시누름.
)
알림: 이것은 조종기가 설정변경 확인을
로써
MODEL.
요구하는 몇개 기능들중의
하나이다.
Model #3을 선택한다.
설정변경을 확인한다.
로써
3.
1초동안누른다.
sure? 가 표시됨.
닫는다.
새model memory의 적절한 modulation을
확 인 한 다 .
다음에 할것은 어디에?
PPM 이나PCM이 우측상단 코너에서 깜박이면, 새model이 다른 receiver type으로
설정된 것이다. 실제로 바뀐modulation으로 변경하고자 하면 조종기를 껐다가 켠다.
NAME the model: p. 25를 보라.
MODEL TYPE (비행기,헬기,글라이더)을 변경: p. 28을 보라.
Modulation [FM (PPM) 이나 PCM]변경: p. 28를 보라.
써보 REVERSE를 사용하기: p. 31를 보라.
END POINT들을 조정하기. : p. 32를 보라.
쓰로틀 관리를 위한
IDLE-DOWN 과 THR-CUT 을 설정하기: p. 33을 보라.
25
MODEL COPY: 는 현재 model data를 다른 model memory(조종기내부의 또는 옵션 DP-16K CAMPac내부의)로 복사한다.
복사될 model memory의 이름이 확실하게 하기위해서 표시된다.
Notes:
•
복사되는(Target쪽) model내의 모든 Data-즉, 이름,type,modulation등-는 덮어쓰여
지게되고, 잃어버린다.
이 Data는 복구불가능하다.
•
하나의 9C조종기에서 다른 조종 9C조종기로 복사하고자한다면 옵션 CAMPac을 사용하라.
(알림: 이 model은 직접 CAMPac의 memory에 쓰여질 것이고, 2번째 조종기내로 다시 복사될
없다. CAMPac에대해 더 많은 정보는 p.10을 보라.)
•
트레이너 FUNC mode를 통해서 교습자의 조종기에 해당 비행기의 설정값을 내장 할
필요가 없다. p.40의 TRAINER를 보라.
8U 또는 9Z memory type의 Data를 변환해서 사용 할 수 없다. 만약 9C에 다른 type의 조종기 상의 Data를
가진 CAMPac을 설치한다면, 모든 Data를 삭제하고 재-초기화 되어야 한다.
•
당신이 이미 프로그램했었던 모델과 유사한 새로운 모델을 시작하라.
백업 이나 새로운 쎗팅값을 연습하기 전에 현재 모델 Data를 다른 model memory로 복사하라.
•
A/S를 보내기전에 당신의 model data를 옵션 CAMPac으로 저장하라.
다른조건(예:헬리콥터는 더 무거운 Blade를 사용할때; 엄청난 바람에서 글라이더를 날릴때;높은고도에서 비행기를 날릴때)
에서 모델을 날리고자 한다면 모델 Data의 복사본에서 수정하라.
•
친구의 9C(A나H)조종기상에서 사용코자한다면 model data를 옵션 CAMPac으로 저장하라. 그러면 친구는당신 model을 날릴수 있고 또는 같은 model이라면 쎗팅하는데 참조가 될 수 있다.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
model 3을 model 5로 복사하라.
NOTE: 이 기능은 설정변경을 적용키위해서는
STEPS:
BASIC menu를 열고,
MODEL submenu를 연다.
조종기에서 확인(Confitrm)이 필요한
기능들 중의 하나이다..
현재 사용중인 model memory를
확인해라.(예:3번)
MODEL COPY로 이동해서 복사될 model을 선택하라.(예:5번)
INPUTS:
1초동안누름.
(만일
ADVANCE라면 다시누름.) to
MODEL.
SELECT 3번을 가르키지 않으면,
MODEL SELECT를 사용하라. p. 25.
로써
5로 이동
다음에 할것은 어디에?
변경된 설정을 확인하라..
1초동안 누름.
sure? 가 표시된다. *
닫아라.
SELECT 방금 만든 복사본을 선택하기: p. 25를 보세요.
이름을 바꾸기(현재의 이름이 복사된 model의 이름과 정확히 같다): p.25를 보세요.
조종기의 전원을 끄고 안전한 보관을 위해 CAMPac을 제거하거나 다른 조종기로
날리기위해 CAMPac을 삽입하기
*
조종기는 반복적으로 "삒~"소리를 내고 model memory가 복사되는 과정을 화면상에 보여준다. 이 과정이 완료 되기 전에 Power를 끄면, data는 복사 되지 않았다는 것을 명심하라.
26
MODEL NAME: 은 현재 model memory의 이름을 지정한다. 각 model에 이름을 부여함으로써, 즉각
인지할 수 있고, 빨리 적당한 model을 선택할수 있고, 잘못된 model의 선택으로인한 추락의 염려를
최소화 시킬 수있다.
조정가능한 것들과 값:
•
8글자 까지 가능.
•
각각의 글자는 영문자,숫자,공백,기호가 될 수 있다.
디폴트로 이름은 MODEL-xx(MODEL-01은 첫번째 모델을 뜻한다.) 의
형태로 지정되어 있다.
NOTE: 하나의 model memory를 다른 memory로 COPY할때, 모델의 이름을 포함해서 모든것이 복사 된다. 비슷하게,
MODEL TYPE 을 변경하거나 MODEL RESET을 실행한다면, MODEL NAME을 포함해서 전체 memory가 초기화된다.
그래서 하나의 model을 COPY한후에 첫번째로 해야 할 일은 충돌을 피하기위해서 새로운 복사본의 이름을 변경하는 것이다.
만일 multiple channel전송을 가능케 하기위해 multiple frequency module을 사용한다면 마지막 2글자를
수신기의 채널을 표시하는데 사용하는 것을 권고한다. 전송주파수에 대해 더 많은 정보를 원할 때는 p.8를 보세요.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
model 3번을 "Cap-232_"(여기서 undeline은 공백을 의미한다.)로 이름을
바꿔라!
STEPS:
MODEL submenu를 열어라.
현재 사용하는 model이 적절한지를
확 인 하 라 . ( 예 : 3 )
NAME으로 이동하고 첫번째 글자를
바꿔라.(예:M을 C로)
바꿀 다음글자를 선택하라.
INPUTS:
1초동안누름.
(만약
ADVANCE,라면 다시 누름.
)
로써
MODEL.
만약
SELECT 가 3을 가르키지 않는다면,
MODEL SELECT를 실행하라. p. 25.
로써
C.
다음에 할것은 어디에?
model의 이름 바꾸기가 완료 될때까지
위의 단계를 반복하라.
로 a
(note: 소문자도 가능하다.)
반복하라.
닫아라.
MODEL TYPE 을 글라이더나 헬리콥터로 바꿔라.: p. 28을 보라.
수신기의 Modulation설정을
PPM에서 PCM혹은 그반대로 바꿔라.: p. 28를 보라.
Servo REVERSE를 사용해보라. p. 31을 보라.
Servo travel을END POINT를 통해서 조정하라.: p. 32를 보라.
Dual/triple rate와exponential (D/R,EXP)을 설정하라.: p. 35를 보라.
27
PARAMETER submenu: 는 한번만 쎗팅하면 다시 쎗팅할 필요가 없는 것들을 설정한다.
한번 사용하고자하는 적당한 모델을 선택하면, 다음 단계는 이 model에 대한 적절한 parameter들을 설정하는 것이다.
• model의 type이 무엇인가?
수신기의 modulation은 어떤 형태인가?[PPM (FM) 이나 PCM]
•
Model이 채널 3상에 Normal throttle을 가지거나 채널 3상에 Full Range Trim이
필요한지(ATL)?
•
Twin aileron기능들 중에 하나를 사용중이라면, 조종기에게 수신기가 5개의 채널만을 사용하는
지를 알려줘야한다.
MODEL RESET 을 사용함으로써 전번에 사용된 memory내의 예전 쎗팅값을 깨끗이 지우는 것이 첫번째로 중요한 것이다.
MODEL RESET:
은 현재 선택된 한개의 model 내의 모든 data를 완전히 초기화시킨다. 걱정하지마라!- 조종기의 이 기능으로
조종기 내에 있는 모든 model들이 뜻하지 않게 지워질 거라고 걱정 할 필요는 없다. 단지 Service center에서만
조종기의 모든 Data를 완전히 지울 수 있다.
조종기의 Memory내 각 model을 지우기위해서(예를들어 팔고자 할때),
반드시 각각의 Model을 SELECT한후, 그 memory를 초기화시키고, 그런다음 다음 Memory를 SELECT해서 초기화하고, 등등 해야한다.
하나의 model을 다른 model에게로 COPY하고자 할때 또는 model의 type을 바꾸고자 할때, 이기능을 이용해서
존재하는 모든 Data를 지울 필요가 없다는 것을 알아야 된다. COPY는 존재하는 model memory내의 MODEL NAME을
포함해서 어떠한 Data도 덮어 쓰기때문이다. MODEL TYPE기능은 MODUL과 이름을 제외한 모든 data를 덮어쓴다.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
model memory 1번을 리셋한다.
STEPS:
현재 사용하는 model이 적절한지를
확 인 하 라 . ( 예 : 1 )
INPUTS:
초기화면에서, 좌측상단의 model이름과
번호를 검사해라. 이것이 맞지않다면
MODEL SELECT 를 사용해라. p.25.
1초동안누름.
(만약
ADVANCE,라면 다시누름.)
NOTE: 이 기능은 설정변경을 적용키위해서는
조종기에서 확인(Confitrm)이 필요한
기능들 중의하나이다.
PARAMETER submenu를 열어라.
로써 menu의 2번째 Page로
로써
PARAMETER.
Memory를 리셋하라.
변경된 설정을 확인하라.
1초동안 누름.
sure?가 표시됨.
*
다음에 할것은 어디에?
닫아라.
memory가 리셋된 지금, 이름은 디폴트값으로 변했다.(예:MODEL-01).
모델의
NAME : p. 25.
다른 모델의 memory를 나의 memory로
COPY : p. 25.
다른 모델을 삭제나 편지하기위해서
SELECT p. 25.
MODEL TYPE 을 글라이더나 헬리콥터로 변경하기: p. 28를 보라.
수신기의 Modulation설정을 PPM에서 PCM혹은 그반대로 바꿔라.: p. 28를 보라.
Servo REVERSE를 사용해보라. p. 31을 보라.
Servo travel을END POINT를 통해서 조정하라.: p. 32를 보라.
Dual/triple rate와exponential (D/R,EXP)을 설정하라.: p. 35를 보라.
*
조종기는 반복적으로 "삒~"소리를 내고 model memory가 복사되는 과정을 화면상에 보여준다. 이 과정이 완료 되기 전에 Power를 끄면, data는 복사 되지 않았다는 것을 명심하라.
28
MODEL TYPE: 은 이 모델에 사용되는 프로그래밍 type을 설정한다.
9C는 다음을 각각 지원 할 수 있는 8개의 model memory가 있다.
•
한개의 비행기(ACRO) memory type(다양한 wing과 tail 형태를 가진). (twin aileron servo,
• twin elevator servo를 참고하고 더 많은 정보는 ELEVON와 V-TAIL를 보라.)
2가지 글라이더 Wing Type(다양한 Tail형태를 가지고서 다시.). 자세한 것은 p.68의 글라이더 MODEL TYPE을 보세요.
CCPM을 포함하는, 5가지의 헬리콥터 swashplate 형태. 자세한것은 p.77의 헬리콥터 MODEL TYPE을 보세요.
비행체를 쎗팅하기 전, 처음으로 반드시 자신의 모델과 가장 잘 맞는 MODEL TYPE을 결정해야한다. (각각의 model memory는
서로다른 model type으로 설정 될 것이다.) 만일 조종기가 9CA라면 ,MODEL TYPE의 디폴트는 ACRO이다. 만약 9CH라면,
디폴트는 HELI(SW1)이다.
ACRO 는 대부분의 비행기들을 위한 가장 좋은 선택이다. 그러나 어떤 환경에서는 GLID2FLP가 더 좋은 선택이 될 수 있다.
ACRO 는 GLID형태들이 할 수 없는 다음의 기능을 제공해 주기 때문에 일반적으로 ACRO가 더 좋은 선택이 된다..
•
ACRO는 다음이 추가된다.
•
SNAP-ROLL
•
AILEVATOR (twin elevator servo 지원)
•
AIRBRAKE (BUTERFLY의 더 많은 것을 설정할 수 있는 버젼)
엔진 비행기를 위한: IDLE-DOWN, THR-CUT, THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing 과 THROTTLE DELAY programming.
•
그러나,
ACRO 에는 없는 것들:
•
START와 SPEED OFFSETS
•
Built-in programming which defaults outboard ailerons as flaperons and sets up two flap servos to also operate as flaperons for a 4-trailing-edge-surface wing.
만일 글라이더나 헬기 MODEL TYPE을 사용한다면, 적절한 model type을 선택하고 쎗팅을 하기위해서 지금 당장 해당 chapter로 가시기
바랍니다. MODEL TYPE을 변경 하는 것은 모델이름을 포함해서, 해당 model memory에 대한 모든 Data를 reset시킨다는 것을 명심하시요.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your model. Ex: ACRO.
STEPS:
BASIC menu를 연후,
PARAMETER submenu를 연다.
[NOTE: 이기능은 설정을 변경코자 할때
추가적인 확인절차가 필요한 기능들중의
하나이다. 단지 치명적인 설정값의
변경만이 이 변경을 허락케하는 추가적인
키입력이 요구된다.
]
MODEL TYPE으로 이동한다.
적당한 MODEL TYPE을 선택한다.
예
: ACRO.
변경을 확인한다.
PARAMETER를 닫는다.
INPUTS:
조종기를 켠다.
1초동안누름
.
(만일
ADVANCE,
라면 다시누름.
)
한 후 PARAMETER를 하이라이트시킴.
로써
PARAMETER를 선택
로써
로써
TYPE.
ACROBATIC. 1초동안 누름.
sure? 가 표시됨.
로써 변경확인함.
로써
BASIC menu로 돌아감.
29
Modulation 선택 ( MODUL): 전송되어지는 Modulation방식(변/복조방식)을 설정한다.
당신 수신기의 Modulation방식은 조종기의 MODUL내에서 PPM나 PCM 중 어떤 것을 사용 할지를 결정한다.
Modulation 설정변경이 유효 할려면 반드시 조종기를 껐다 켜야한다는 것을 명심해라. 또한, 만약 PCM을
선택한다면, 당신이 설정하고자 FailSafe (F/S)에 대해 이해한 후 설정을 해야 한다(p.43). 이 두가지방식의
Modulation은 FM 파형으로 전송되고, FM trainer cord와 FM module을 사용한다.
PCM = Pulse Code Modulation PPM = Pulse Position Modulation (FM이라고도 함.).
조정가능한 것들
:
•
채널수와 관계없이 모든 Futaba PCM1024수신기들을 위한 PCM쎗팅.
(예:R138DP/148DP/149DP, R309DPS)
•
채널수와 관계없이 모든 Futaba호환(negative shift) FM수신기들을 위한 PPM쎗팅.
(예:R127DF, R123F, R148DF)
•
R128DP, R105iP 같은 PCM512 수신기들은 호환 되지 않는다.
•
타사 PCM수신기 또는 positive shift방식 FM수신기들과는 호환되지 않는다
(예: JR, Airtronics).
•
조종기에서 PCM을 사용하기 위해 별도의 Module을 필요로 하지는 않는다.
PCM 에대한 자세한 정보는 우리 Website를 방문해 주세요.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
model 1을 FM (PPM) 에서
PCM으로 바꿔라.
NOTE:
MODEL SELECT 내에서 model을 변경했을때, 새로운 모델이
다른 Modulation type으로 설정 되어 있다면, 반드시 조종기의
전원을 껐다 켜야 새로운 Modulation으로 변경이 된다. 해당 Modulation은 당신이 전원을 껐다가켤때까지이 것을 알리기위해 초기화면
상에서 깜빡일 것이다. 자세한 것은 p.25의 MODEL SELECT를 보라.
STEPS:
현재 사용하는 model memory가 적절
한가를 확인하라.(예:1)
INPUTS:
초기화면에서, 좌측상단의 model이름과
번호를 검사해라.이것이 맞지않다면
MODEL SELECT 를 사용해라. p.25.
다음에 할것은 어디에?
BASIC menu를 연후,
PARAMETER submenu를 연다.
1초동안누름.
(
만일
ADVANCE,
라면 다시누름
.)
로써 메뉴의 2번째 페이지로 이동.
로써
PARAMETER.
로 MODUL. PCM로 설정
전원을껐다켜라고 화면에서 깜박임.
MODUL로 이동해서 설정값을 바꾼다.
menu를 닫은 후 전원을 껐다켠다.
P
OWER
O
FF
. P
OWER
O
N
.
자 이제 적절한 Modulation이 선택되고, 9C는 수신기와 통신을 해야한다.
만일 그렇지 않다면, 수신기의 modulation/주파수를 확인하라. [Futaba
수신기의 끝이 F이면 PPM을(예:R127DF) 사용하고, 끝이 P이면 PCM을
(예:R149DP) 사용한다.
MODEL TYPE을 글라이더/헬리콥터로 변경하라.: p. 28을 보세요.
PCM
수신기가 간섭(방해전파)을 받을 때를 대비해서 F/S를 설정하라: p.43을 보세요.
servo의
REVERSE를 이용하자: p. 31을 보세요.
Servo travel을 END POINT를 통해서 조정하라.: p. 32를 보라.
Dual/triple rate와exponential (D/R,EXP)을 설정하라: p. 35를 보라.
Second aileron (
AIL-2) (ACRO/ GLID1FLP에서만..): changes the default choice for dual aileron servos from channels 6
(
FLAPERON) or 7 (AIL-DIF) to channels 5 and 6. This allows you to utilize these 2 great functions while utilizing a 5-channel receiver. NOTE: Changing AIL-2 only tells the system which servos to utilize if FLAPERON or AIL-DIF is activated. You still must activate that function and complete its setup. For details on twin aileron servos, including using AIL-2, see p. 47.
30
Adjustable travel limit (
ATL):
은 " channel 3
TRIM LEVER
(T
HROTTLE T RIM
) "
가 단지 low throttle에서만 유효하게 만들고,high throttle에서는 Trim을
불가능케 한다. 이것은 아이들링 Trim의 변화로인한 " Pushrod jamming:(역자주:Pushload가 범위를 벋어나 움직이지 않는 상태)" 발생을 방지한다.
이 기능은 디폴트로 ON된다. 쓰로틀을 위해 채널3번을 사용하지 않는다면, 다른 채널들과 같은 Trim동작을 원할 것이다. 이럴때는 ATL을 OFF시켜라.
만일 ATL이 스틱의 아래부분 대신 스틱의 윗부분에서 효과있게 하려면, THR-REV쎗팅을 리버스하라. 이것은 단지 현재 수정하고
있는 모델이 아니라 조종기내의 모든 모델들에 영향을 미친다는 것을 명심하라. Servo REVERSE는 p.31을 보라.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
베틀로봇,탱크,airbrake그리고 채널3의
다른용도사용을 위해 ATL을 ON에서
OFF로 변경하라.
STEPS:
BASIC menu를 연후,
PARAMETER submenu를 열어라.
ATL
로 이동하고 값을 변경하라
(예: OFF로)
닫아라.
INPUTS:
1초동안 누름.
(만일
ADVANCE,
라면 다시 누름.
)
로써 메뉴의 2번째 페이지로 이동.
로써
PARAMETER.
로 OFF설정.
다음에 할것은 어디에?
하나의 스틱상에서 throttle/steering을 하는 tank-style조종을 위해 ELEVON을 설정: p.48을 보라.
low-stick에서의 채널3을 쎗팅하기위해 IDLE-DOWN 과 THR-CUT을 설정:p.33을 보라.
보조채널5-9를 재배치(예:Dial -> switch/slider): p.39를 보라.
servo의 REVERSE를 이용하자: p. 31을 보세요.
Servo travel을 END POINT를 통해서 조정하라.: p. 32를 보라.
Dual/triple rate와exponential (D/R,EXP)을 설정하라: p. 35를 보라.
Servo reversing (
REVERSE): 는 CONTROL STICK
의 움직임에 반응하는 개별적인 써보의 방향을 바꾼다. [채널9번은 switch로만
가능하다.(그리고 PCM수신기에서만 가능하다.),이채널의 써보 REVERSE는, 이채널에대한 Switch할당도 포함하는 AUX-CH제어화면
내에 존재한다. p.39를보라] CCPM헬리콥터들은, 어떤써보들을 리버스시키기전에 (p.79)SWASH AFR부분을 먼저 확실하게 읽어보라.
CCPM 헬리콥터들은 제외하고, 항상 어떤 다른 프로그래밍 전에 써보 리버스작업을 완료하라.
FLAPERON 또는 V-TAIL와 같은, 다수의 써보들로 제어되는 이미만들어진 ACRO/GLID의
기능을 사용한다면, "써보가 리버스 될 필요가 있는지" 혹은 "해당 기능의 설정값이 리버스될
필요가 있는지" 말하기가 애매 할 것이다. 특화된 기능등에 대한 자세한 사항은
그것에 대한 기능을 찾아보세요.
매 비행전에 항상 써보의 방향을 점검하라.
NOTE:
THR-REV 는 쓰로틀스틱 중앙의위쪽부분에서 트림기능이 동작하도록 하는 것을 포함한 모든 Throttle제어기능을
리버스한다. THR-REV를 사용할려면, 조종기를 끄고, MODE와 END key를 동시에 누르고 있는 상태로 조종기를 켠다. CURSOR
DOWN키로 THR-REV로 이동하고, DIAL로 REV로 바꾼다. 다시 조종기를 끄고 켠다. 이 변경은 조종기내의 모든 모델들에 적용된다.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
엘리베이터 써보의 방향을 리버스
하시요.
다음에 할것은 어디에?
STEPS:
REVERSE 기능을 연다.
저절한 채널과 방향을
선택한다.(예;ELE REV)
INPUTS:
1초동안 누름.
(만일
ADVANCE,
라면 다시누름.
로써
REVERSE.
로써
ELE.
로써 REV.
닫는다.
Servo travel을 END POINT로 조종한다.: p. 32.를 보라.
Dual/triple rates 와 Exponential (D/R,EXP)을 설정하라.: p. 35를 보라.
비행시간을 설정하자: p.38을 보라.
Trainer기능을 설정하자: p.40을 보라.
31
End Point of servo travel 조정 ( END POINT, EPA라고도 부름): 대부분의 유연한 Travel조정이 가능하다. 이것은 한 Servo의
양방향에 영향을 주는 쎗팅이 아닌, 각 개개 Servo의 Travel을 독립적으로 조정한다. 그리고, CCPM헬리콥터인 경우에는,
End Point들을 조절하기전에 SWASH AFR(p.79를 보라.)을 먼저 확인하라.
조정가능한 것들:
•
서보의
각각의 방향을 독립적으로 조정 할 수 있다.
•
0%(Servo가 전혀 움직이지 않음)~140% 범위를 가진다. 100%에서는, Servo의 회전각이
채널 1~4는 약 40°이고 채널 5~8은 약55°가 된다.
•
쎗팅%값을 줄이는 것은 Servo의 해당 방향으로의 회전각을 줄이는 것이다.
예 제 들 :
•
캬브레터에서 휨을 방지하기위해 throttle High끝을 조정하고, 캬브레터가 완전히 닫히도록 Low를 조정한다.
•
최대 down travel과 함께, 직진/수평비행 trim조정을위해 충분한 만큼의 up travel로써 flap을 조정하라.(약자주:뭔소린지?)
END POINT 는 아마도 써보의 한쪽 방향으로만 움직이도록 하기위해 0으로 조정될 것이다. 이러한 Flap들은 또한
Spolier들처럼 동작되기를 원하지는 않는다.
•
Retract servo들은 비례제어가 아니다. 그러므로 END POINT을 변경한다고 해도 이 써보는 조정 되지 않는다.
END POINT 는 단순히 개개의 servo를 조정한다. FLAPERON, AILEVATOR,등과 같은 Mix나 Preset Progrmmming을 통해서
이 써보와의 조합으로써 동작하는 다른 어떠한 써보에 영향을 미치지않는다. 이기능은 개개의 써보가 링키지의 휘어짐이나
다른 간섭을받지 않도록 최적설정을 할 수 있도록 하기위함이다. FLAPERON과 같은 하나의 기능의 전체 Travel을
조정하기위해서는 그 기능의 제어 하에서 조정을 하라. CCPM 헬리콥터는 SWASH AFR내에서 collective pitch와
같은 해당 기능의 총 Travel을 조정하라.
링키지 또는 END POINT를 조정하라? 가장 좋은 방법은 링키지를 조정하는 것으로, END POINT를 사용하기전에 우선 가능한
최적설정에 가깝게 링키지를 조정하라. 고급의 END POINT 설정은 써보의 더 좋은 위치정확성과 더 큰 파워를 발휘할 수 있는 위치를
얻는 것이다.(디지털 써보를 사용 한다는 것을 제외하면..)
Higher END POINT values also mean longer travel time to reach the desired position, as you are utilizing more of the servo's total travel. (For example, using 50% END POINT would give you only half the steps of servo travel, meaning every click of trim has twice the effect and the servo gets there in half the time).
• end point (and moving the linkage) = torque, accuracy, but transit time to get there.
• end point (instead of adjusting linkages) = travel time, but torque, accuracy.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Decrease the flap servo throw in the upward direction to 5% to allow trimming of level flight only and down travel to 85% to prevent binding.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open END POINT function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE, to
END POINT. again.)
Choose proper channel and set direction. (Ex: flap up 5%) to flap.
flap control [default is V
R
(A)].
to 5%.*
V
R
(A). to
Close.
Go to
SERVO display to confirm desired end result: see p. 42.
Move auxiliary channels 5-9 to different dial(s)/switch(es)/slider(s): see p. 39.
Set up IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT to slow/cut the engine: see p. 33.
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential ( D/R,EXP): see p. 35.
Set up flight timers: see p. 38.
Set up trainer functions: see p. 40.
Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 44.
Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 49.
*You can reset to the initial values by pressing the D
IAL
for one second.
32
Engine idle management:
IDLE-DOWN 과 THR-CUT: 기능들은 엔진동작을 간단하고, 지속적으로 제공키위해 디지털 T
HROTTLE
T
RIM
과 함께 동작한다. 더이상 착륙이나 이륙시 정확한 트림위치를 얻기위해서 소동을 필 필요가 없다. 추가적인
엔진 조정을위해서는 THROTTLE-NEEDLE (p. 56) 과 THROTTLE DELAY (p. 57)을 보시오.
만일 당신의 throttle cut 과 idle down이 잘못된 위치에서 동작한다면 - 아이들이 아닌 Full Throttle위치-
THR REV 기능이 리버스되어 있는 것이다. 이를위해 Page 31 을 보라.
IDLE-DOWN (ACRO 만해당): lowers the engine idle for: sitting on the runway prior to take off, stalls and spins, and landings.
The normal idle setting is a little higher for easier starts and safe flights with less risk of dead sticks.
Important note: The IDLE-DOWN function is not normally used when starting the engine, and its accidental operation may keep your engine from starting. The 9C warns that IDLE-DOWN is on when the transmitter is turned on. Be sure to turn off the function, or override the warning by pressing both 2 S
ELECT
/C
URSOR
keys in unison and holding for 1 second if you intended the function to be on.
이기능은 어떤한 switch의 위치에도 부여될 수 있다. 어떤 모형인들은 때대로 IDLE-DOWN을 Switch의 한쪽에
부여하고 그반대쪽에는
THR-CUT을 부여하기도 한다. 이 것은 엔진 시동을 위해서 일반적이지는 않은 것이다.
디폴트로 IDLE-DOWN 은 SWITCH C의 Center와 down위치에 부여된다. 이것은 또한 SWITCH C down위치에서
THR-CUT 과도 잘 동작한다.
이 SWITCH가 up되면 일반적인 비행상태고, center는 slower maneuvers/landing
이고, down 은 engine cut이다. 만일 IDLE-DOWN 이나 THR-CUT을 스프링이내장된
TRAINER SWITCH F (9CA) or
H (9CH)에 부여한다면 트레이너 기능을 사용시, 지도하는 학생의 트로틀제어가 되지않아 엔진이 멈추는 위험을 감수 해야 한다.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Decrease the throttle setting at idle with the flip of a switch for spins and landings.
STEPS:
Open BASIC menu, then open IDLE-
DOWN function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second. to
(If
IDLE-DOWN.
ADVANCE, again.)
Activate the function.
With T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
at idle, adjust the rate until engine idles as desired.*
Optional: change switch assignment.
Choose desired switch and position.
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
.
until engine idles as desired.
to SW. to
S
WITCH
.
to POSI. to desired position.
Where next?
Close.
THR-CUT: see p. 34.
*Normally a value of 10- 20%. Secure the fuselage, engine running. Set the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
to idle. Adjust the
IDLE-DOWN rate while flipping the switch ON and OFF until the desired idle is achieved. Be sure to throttle up periodically to allow the engine to “clean out” and idle reliably.
33
Throttle cut (
THR-CUT) (ACRO/HELI):
은 switch를 움직임으로써 엔진을 정지시킬 수 있는 쉬운 방법을 제공한다.(
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
이 Idle위치에 있을 때) 이기능은 idle위치에서 가능하고 high throttle위치에서는 잘못된 스틱 조작에의한 뜻밖의 사고를 방지하기위해
동작하지 않는다. HELI 에서는 p.82 THR.에 추가적인 쎗팅이 있다.
이 스위치의 위치와 방향이 반드시 설정 되어야한다. 뜻밖의 잘못된switch assign으로 인한 비행중의
우연한 스틱 불능상태를 막기위해서 디폴트로 OFF되어 있다. p.33의 IDLE-DOWN 과
THR-CUT 에 대한 부분을 보시오.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Switch를 움직여 엔진을 정지시키기
위해 throttle setting(idle위치)을 감소 시켜라.
STEPS:
BASIC menu¸ 열고,
THR-CUT 기능을 연다.
INPUTS:
1초동안 누름.
(만일
ADVANCE,
라면 다시누름.
)
(반드시 Switch를 Assign해야 한다는 것을
명심하라. 디폴트는 NULL(아무것도 Assign
되지않은상태)이다. SWITCH C의 down 위치를
추천하고, 또한,IDLE-DOWN은 SWITCH C의 center/down위치로 이미 프로그램되어져 있다.)
기능을 활성화 시켜라. 원하는 SWITCH를
고르고, 이 기능이 활성화 될 위치를
선택하라.
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
을 아이들위치에 놓고, 엔진이
완전히 닫일때까지-단, throttle linkage가
구부러지지 않을 정도-rate를 조정하라.*
다음에 할 것은 어디에?
로
THR-CUT.
로
로
MIX.
로 SW. 로
POSI. 로
C를 down위치로.
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
.
로
RATE. 완전히 닫일때까지.
닫는다.
dual/triple rate와 exponential ( D/R,EXP)을 설정: p. 35를 보라.
TRAINER 기능을 설정: p.40을 보라.
Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 44.
Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 49.
* 일반적으로, 쎗팅값은 10~20%가 적절하다. carburetor의 barrel(공기흡입구)을 보면서 완전히 닫일때가 적당한 쎗팅값을 얻다. 그런후 실제 엔진을
걸어보아서 테스트해본다.
34
Dual/triple rates 와 exponential ( D/R,EXP): 보정된 Rate와 익스포넨셜(지수함수:기하급수적함수값)을 지정한다.
Dual/Triple Rates: 는 Switch를 전환 함으로써 servo travel(동작량)을 증감 시키거나,또는 ACRO/GLIDER
에서는 어떤 스틱위치에의해 예약된 일을 할 수 있다. Dual rate는,Aileron과같은 등록된 제어
-단지 하나의 써보(예: 채널1)가아닌-기능에 영향을 미친다.예로 aileron dual rate를
조정하면,FLAPERON 이나AIL-DIF를 사용시는 양쪽의 aileron servo에 그리고 AILEVATOR 이나 ELEVON
이나 CCPM helicopter를 사용시는 aileron 과 elevator servo의 travel에 모두 영향을 미칠 것이다.
활성화:
•
S
WITCH
, A-H중의 아무거나. 3-position Switch가 선택되면, dual rate가 즉각 triple rate로 된다.(예제를 보라).
•
Stick position (
ACRO/GLIDER). (Ex: On rudder you normally use only the center 3/4 of the stick movement except for extreme maneuvers such as snaps/spins/stalls. As long as your R
UDDER
S
TICK
does not exceed 90% of maximum throw, the rudder responds at your lower rate, allowing small, gentle corrections. When the stick passes 90% (ie. stall turn), the rudder goes to high rate’s 90%, which is a MUCH higher amount of travel than your low rate at 89%.)
Ex:
EPA = 1”
At 89%
At 90%
Low Rate = 50% High Rate = 100%
Low Rate = .45”
High Rate = .9”
100% 90% 0%
High Rate
0% 30%
Low Rate
Low Rate High Rate
90% 100%
High Rate
100%
조정가능한 것들:
•
범위: 0~140%(0 쎗팅값은 완전히 제어가 비활성화 됨). 초기값(100%)
•
Adjustable for each direction(
ACRO/GLIDER). (ie. Up/down, left/right) (Ex: Most models fly upright without any elevator trim, but require some down elevator when inverted just to maintain level flight. By increasing the down travel by the amount required to hold the model inverted, the model now has equal travel available from level upright or level inverted.)
Exponential: 은 플라잉을 더욱 즐겁게하기위해 스틱위치에 따른 써보의 반응 곡선을 변경한다. rudder, aileron, elevator
, throttle(HELI type은 대신 THROTTLE CURVE를 사용함.)에 대해 스틱중간부근에서 써보의 움직임을 더 또는 덜
왜 익스포넨셜을 사용하는가? 많은 모형들에서 가장 좋은 기술을 수행하기 위해서는 많은 travel(동작량)을 요구한다.
그러나, 익스포넨셜 없이, 중립부근에서 "과민"해기기 때문에, 비행시 기분이 나빠지고, 작은 스틱의 움직임도 매우 다루기
힘들게 만든다. 추가적으로, 각각의 비율에 대한 서로다른 익스포넨셜을 쎗팅함으로써, 아래에서 예시한 것처럼, 각 비율내에서 작은
스틱량에 대한 효과를동등하게 만들 수 있다.
익스포넨셜을 이해하는 가장 좋은 방법은 아래의 것을 시도해 보는 것이다.:
• D/R,EXP화면에서 현재 아무런 변경을 하지않는 상태에서, SWITCH D를 "아래로"(AILERON STICK쪽으로 향하게) 움직인다.
• Cursor를 EXP로 움직이고, Dial을 돌려서 100%에 맞춘다.
• SWITCH D를 "위"로 움직인다. AILERON STICK을 ¼ stick위치에 옮기고, SWITCH D를 아래로 움직인다.
• Travel이 얼마나 덜 움직이는지 살펴보라.
• Stick을 3/4위치로 이동시키고 반복한다. 만약 잘모르겠다면, Travel이 얼마나 더 가까와 졌는지 보라.
35
조정가능한것들:
• 중앙부근에서 더욱 민감하게하는 것.(+ exponetial. 예제를 보라.)
• 중앙부근에서 덜 민감하게하는 것.(- exponetial. 예제를 보라.)
• 각 방향에 대한 조종.(ACRO/GLIDER)
Throttle에 대해서는, 익스포넨셜은 최하위치에서 적용된다. nitro 와 gasoline engine들에게서 linear한-즉, 각1/4 stick에서는
가능한 범위에서 엔진 RPM이 25% 증가-throttle 반응을 갖기위해 도움를 준다.(대부분의 엔진들은 이 부분의 범위가 5~60%이다).
헬리콥터를 위한 특별언급:
헬리콥터 모형은 swich위치당 써보travel의 각side에 대한 rate라기보다는 단지 각 switch
위치에대한 하나의 rate를 가진다. 추가적으로, 각 switch위치에대한 D/R,EXP를 쎗팅하는 것은 No.쎗팅에 커서가 깜박이고, 이곳에서 switch 위치를 변경해야 한다는 것이다. 단지 그 Switch를 움직인다고 해서 화면의 쎗팅 값이 영향을 받지 않는다.
allowing dual rates to be assigned with idle-up and other features on certain switches, and does not require putting the model in that condition to make modifications.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Set up dual rates and exponential in a
HELI model.
STEPS:
Open D/R,EXP.
Choose channel.
Choose first switch position.
Set rate and exponential (Ex: high rate
= 95%, 0% exponential.)
Go to 2 nd switch position and set rate and exponential.
Optional: if using a 3 position switch, set 3 rd rate.
Optional: assign dual rates to have one for each condition.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE, to
D/R,EXP. again.) to desired channel.
to 95%.
Confirm 0%
EXP.
to DN.
Repeat above.
to
CT.
Repeat above.
to COND.
Repeat steps above to adjust for each condition.
36
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Set up aileron triple rates on S
WITCH
C
with travel settings of 75% (normal),
25% (slow roll) and 140% (extreme aerobatics) and exponential settings of
0%, +15%, and -40% respectively.
NOTE: This normal rate has no exponential so it has a very linear, normal feel. This slow roll rate has
positive exponential (the opposite of what most people normally use), which makes the servos more responsive around center. This makes the servos feel the same around center in the normal and low rates, but still gives a very slow roll rate at full stick.
The 3D rate (extreme aerobatics) has a very high distance of travel B nearly twice that of the normal rate.
Therefore, using a very high negative exponential setting softens how the servos respond around center stick.
This makes the servos respond similarly around center stick for a more comfortable feel.
Many modelers like to set up all 3 triple rates on a single 3-position switch, creating a “slow and pretty mode”, a “normal mode”, and a “wild stunts mode” all with the flip of a single switch. To do so, simply set up rates for all 3 controls and assign all 3 to the same 3-position switch.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open D/R,EXP function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE, to D/R,EXP. to desired channel. again.)
Choose the channel to change
(Ex: aileron is already selected)
Optional: change switch assignment.
Confirm switch is in desired position and set rate. (Ex: up = high rate, 75%).
to C.
C to up position.
A
ILERON
S
TICK
. to
A
ILERON
S
TICK
. to
Move S
WITCH
to 2nd rate position and set this particular rate.
(Ex: center = low rate, 25%).
Optional: if using a 3 position
S
WITCH
, move S
WITCH
to 3rd position
and set this rate (Ex: down = 3D rate,
140%).
Optional: instead of using a switch, you can set high rates to be triggered when the stick moves past a certain point. To test this, set aileron high rate to 25%. Now set switch
assignment to AIL (90%). Move
AILERON STICK
to the right and notice the huge jump in travel after the stick moves 90% of its distance.
C to center position.
A
ILERON
S
TICK
. to
A
ILERON
S
TICK
. to
C to down position.
AILERON
A
ILERON
AILERON
to
S
TICK
. to
S
TICK
. to
C to up position.
AILERON
S
TICK
. to
S
TICK
. to
SW. to ail (90%).
Set each rate’s
EXP.
(Ex: 0%, +15%, -40%)
AILERON
S
TICK
and watch screen graph. See the change?!
You may also change the trigger point by holding the stick at the desired point, then pressing and holding the
DIAL
.
C to up position.
confirm EXP reads 0.
C to down position.
AILERON
S
TICK
. to
AILERON
S
TICK
.
C to center position. to + 15%.
repeat to set low rate expo to -40%.
Repeat above steps for elevator and rudder.
Close.
Set up flight timers: see p. 38.
Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 40.
Adjust the sensitivity of the trims: see p. 41.
Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 44.
Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 49.
Set up programmable mixes to meet your specific needs: see p. 53.
www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html for all triple rates on a single switch, etc.
37
TIMER submenu (스톱워치기능): 는 완료시까지 남아있는시간, 하나의 연료탱크로(하나의 배터리로 등등..) Flying
할 수 있는시간 과 같은 2개의 전자시계를 제어한다.
Adjustability:
•
Count down timer: starts from the chosen time, displays time remaining. If the time is exceeded, it continues to count below 0.
•
Count up timer: starts at 0 and displays the elapsed time up to 99 minutes 59 seconds.
•
Independent to each model, and automatically updates with model change.
•
In either
TIMER mode, the timer beeps once each minute. During the last twenty seconds, there's a beep each two seconds.
During the last ten seconds, there's a beep each second. A long tone is emitted when the time selected is reached.
•
To Reset, choose the desired timer with the S
ELECT
key (while at the startup screen), then press and hold
DIAL
for 1 second.
•
Activation by either direction of S
WITCH
A-H, by T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
( STK-THR) (Using the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
is convenient if you are keeping track of fuel remaining, or for an electric, how much battery is left); or by the power S
WITCH
(
PWRSW).
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Set timer 2 to count down 4-1/2 minutes, being controlled by
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
position. This is utilized to keep track of actual
Throttle on time to better correlate with fuel/battery usage.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open
BASIC menu, then open
TIMER function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE, to page 2.
again.) to TIMER.
Go to TIMER<2>.
Adjust time to 4 min. 30 sec., count down.
Assign to T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
and set trigger point (if timer is to trigger
BELOW this throttle point, arrow points down).
so to 4.
to
SW. to 30.
2 steps to
STK THR.
to POSI.
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
to desired position (Ex: 1/4 stick).
for 1 second to set.
Close.
Adjust
END POINTs after first flight test: see p. 32.
Adjust auxiliary channel assignments (ex: move flaps to a switch): see p. 39.
Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 40.
38
Auxiliary channel function (including channel 9 controls) (
AUX-CH): defines the relationship between the transmitter controls and the receiver output for channels 5-9. Also, the CH9 SERVO REVERSE is used to change the CH9 servo direction.
Note that the CH9 functions are only visible in the AUX-CH screen when PCM modulation is selected. The 9th channel is not supported in
FM modulation.
Adjustability:
• channels 5-9 may be assigned to any S
WITCH
(A-H), slider [VR(D) and VR(E)], or knob [VR(A-C)] (for example, moving flaps to a switch or slider), but not the primary control sticks (use programmable mixes to do so, p. 59);
• multiple channels may be assigned to the same switch, slider or knob;
• channels set to “ NULL” are only controlled by mixes. (Ex: utilizing 2 channels for 2 rudder servos. See mixes, p. 59.)
Remember that if you assign primary control of a channel to a switch which you later use for other functions (like dual/triple rates or airbrakes), every time you use that other function you will also be moving the auxiliary channel.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Assign flaps to the right slider [VR(E)] and set channel 7 to NULL in preparation to use it as a smoke system control (the smoke system being activated later by a throttle-to-ch.-7 mix).
Where next?
STEPS:
Open
BASIC menu, then open AUX-CH function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE, to page 2.
again.)
Choose the channel to change. (ex: ch. 6.)
Change primary control. (ex: to slider.)
Repeat as needed. (ex: ch. 7 to NULL.) to to
Vr-E.
Ch 7. to
Close.
Programmable mixes: see p. 53.
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential ( D/R,EXP): see p. 35.
Adjust
SUB-TRIM of auxiliary channel to adjust center S
WITCH
position: see p. 41.
Adjust
END POINTs (sets end points of travel even when using a switch): see p. 32.
39
TRAINER: for training novice pilots with optional trainer cord connecting 2 transmitters. The instructor has several levels of controllability. programming set at the student's transmitter.
•
FUNC: When the T
RAINER
S
WITCH
is ON, the channel set to this mode can be controlled by the student, controlled according to any mixing set at the instructor's transmitter.
•
OFF: The channel set to this mode cannot be controlled by the student even when the T
RAINER
S
WITCH
is ON. The set channel is controlled by the instructor only, even when the T
RAINER
S
WITCH
is ON.
•
S
WITCH
: controlled by spring-loaded S
WITCH
F (9CA) or H (9CH) only. Not assignable.
•
Compatibility: The 9C may be master or student with any Futaba FM transmitter compatible with the cord. Simply plug the optional trainer cord (For 9C series, sold separately) into the trainer connection on each transmitter, and follow the guidelines below.
Adjustability:
•
NORM: When the T
RAINER
S
WITCH
is ON, the channel set to this mode can be controlled by the student. The set channel is controlled according to any
Examples:
•
When throttle/collective are set to FUNC, 5-channel helicopter practice is possible with a 4-channel transmitter.
•
Set up the model in a second transmitter, use
NORM mode to quickly and safely check proper operation of all functions, then allow the student radio to fully fly the model.
•
Using NORM mode, set lower throws, different exponentials, even different auxiliary channel settings on the student radio (if it has these features).
•
To ease the learning curve, elevator and aileron may be set to the NORM or FUNC mode, with the other channels set to
OFF and controlled by the instructor.
Precautions:
•
NEVER turn on the student transmitter power.
ALWAYS set the student transmitter modulation mode to
PPM.
•
BE SURE that the student and instructor transmitters have identical trim settings and control motions. Verify by switching back and forth while moving the control sticks.
•
FULLY extend the instructor's antenna. Collapse the student's antenna.
•
Always remove the student transmitter's RF module (if it is a module-type transmitter).
•
When the
TRAINER function is active, the snap roll function is deactivated. Other functions, such as IDLE-DOWN and
THR-CUT, which have been assigned to the same switch, are not deactivated. Always double check your function assignments prior to utilizing the TRAINER function.
•
When you select a different model, the TRAINER function is deactivated in the current model for safety reasons.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Turn on the
TRAINER system and set up so student has: fully functional control of aileron and elevator to support FLAPERON and AILEVATOR; normal control of rudder to allow lowered travel; and no throttle channel control (with the instructor for safety).
Where next?
STEPS:
Open
BASIC menu, then open
TRAINER function.
Activate TRAINER.
Choose desired channel(s) and proper training type(s).
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE, again.) to page 2.
to
OFF.
to TRAINER. past AIL and ELE (default OK).
to THR, to to
RUD, to
Close.
TEST student radio function fully prior to attempting to fly!
Set student 9C to
PPM (required regardless of receiver’s modulation): see p. 28.
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential ( D/R,EXP) on student 9C: see p. 35.
Reset trims on student 9C: see p. 41.
40
TRIM submenu: resets and adjust effectiveness of digital trims.
The 9CA has digital trims which are different from conventional mechanical trim sliders.
Each T
RIM
L
EVER
is actually a two-direction switch. Each time the T
RIM
L
EVER
is pressed, the trim is changed a selected amount. When you hold the T
RIM
L
EVER
, the trim speed increases. The current trim position is graphically displayed on the start up screen.
The TRIM submenu includes two functions that are used to manage the trim options.
HELI models only: OFFSET is available in the idle ups. If OFFSET is inhibited, adjustment of the T
RIM
L
EVERS
will adjust the trims for all flight conditions. If OFFSET is active, then moving the trims within any one condition will effect only that condition. See OFFSET, p. 86.
Trim reset (
RESET): electronically centers the trims to their default values. Note that the SUB-TRIM settings and the trim
STEP rate are not reset by this command.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Reset trims to neutral after having adjusted all linkages.
NOTE: This is one of several functions for which the radio requires confirmation to make a change.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open
BASIC menu, then open
TRIM submenu.
Request and confirm the reset.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE, to TRIM. for 1 second.
Beep sounds.
Close.
Adjust
SUB-TRIMs: see p. 42.
Adjust trim rate (
STEP): see below.
Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32.
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential ( D/R,EXP): see p. 35.
again.)
Trim step ( STEP): changes the rate at which the trim moves when the T
RIM
L
EVER
is activated. It may be set from 1 to 40 units, depending on the characteristics of the aircraft. Most ordinary aircraft do well at about 2 to 10 units. Generally larger trim steps are for models with large control throws or for first flights to ensure sufficient trim to properly correct the model.
Smaller trim steps are later used to allow very fine adjustments in flight.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Double the sensitivity (larger step) of the
AILERON TRIM LEVERS
for a first flight of an aerobatic model to ensure sufficient range to trim the model for level flight.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open TRIM submenu and choose the
STEP you wish to change. (Ex: aileron)
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE, to TRIM.
Adjust the size of the step. (Ex: incr. to 8) to 8.
Repeat as desired for other channels.
to ELEV.
Repeat as needed.
to new setting.
again.)
Close.
Adjust sub trims: see p. 42.
Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32.
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential ( D/R,EXP): see p. 35.
41
SUB-TRIM: makes small changes or corrections to the neutral position of each servo. Range is -120 to +120, with 0 setting, the default, being no SUB-TRIM.
We recommend that you center the digital trims before making SUB-TRIM changes, and that you try to keep all of the
SUB-TRIM values as small as possible. Otherwise, when the
SUB-TRIMs are large values, the servo's range of travel is restricted on one side.
The recommended procedure is as follows:
• measure and record the desired surface position;
• zero out both the trims (
TRIM RESET menu) and the SUB-TRIMs (this menu);
• mount servo arms and linkages so that the control surface’s neutral is as correct as possible; and
• use a small amount of SUB-TRIM to make fine corrections.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Adjust the flap servo’s
SUB-TRIM until its center exactly matches the aileron servo’s center, as they are to work together as flaperons.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open
BASIC menu, then open
SUB-TRIM.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE, again.) to SUB-TRIM.
Choose the channel to adjust, and adjust until surfaces match. (Ex: flap) as needed.
Repeat for other channels.
as needed.
Close.
Adjust trim steps: see p. 41.
Adjust END POINTs: see p. 32.
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential ( D/R,EXP): see p. 35.
to each channel,
SERVO display and cycle submenu: displays radio's output to channels 1-8.
The servo submenu includes two features:
• real-time bar-graph display to demonstrate exactly what commands the transmitter is sending to the servos. (This can be particularly handy in setting up models with complicated mixing functions, because the results of each stick, lever, knob, switch input and delay circuit may be immediately seen.); and
• servo cycle function to help locate servo problems prior to in-flight failures.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
View the result of reassigning channel
6 from VR(A) knob to three-position
S
WITCH
C.
Cycle the channel 6 servo.
Where next?
STEPS:
Complete desired programming function.
(Ex: in
AUX-CH, move ch. 6 to S
WITCH
C)
Open the SERVO function.
INPUTS:
See AUX-CH for details. (p. 39.) for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE,
Move each control to see exactly how operating. (Ex: S
WITCH
C in all positions)
Prepare all servos to be cycled and cycle.
again.)
1 step to SERVO.
C to center position.
Note change in position of ch. 6 servo.
Plug in servos. P
OWER
O
N
.
End cycling and close.
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential ( D/R,EXP): see p. 35.
Set up desired programmable mixes: see p. 54.
Set up dual aileron servos: see p. 44.
Set up dual elevator servos: see p. 49.
42
FailSafe (loss of clean signal and low receiver battery) submenu (
PCM mode only) (F/S): sets responses in case of loss of signal or low Rx battery.
FailSafe (
F/S): instructs a PCM receiver what to do in the event radio interference is received.
Adjustability:
•
Each channel may be set independently.
•
The NORM (normal) setting holds the servo in its last commanded position.
•
The F/S (FailSafe) function moves each servo to a predetermined position.
•
NOTE: the setting of the throttle's F/S also applies to the Battery F/S (see below).
Examples:
•
The F/S setting is used in certain competitions to spin the aircraft to the ground prior to flying away and doing potential damage elsewhere. Conversely, may also be used to go to neutral on all servos, hopefully keeping the plane flying as long as possible.
•
Competition modelers often maintain the NORM function so that brief interference will not affect their model's maneuver.
•
Set the throttle channel so that the engine idles when there is interference (
ACRO). This may give enough time to fly away from and recover from the radio interference and minimize damage if crashed.
•
For helicopters, NORM is typically the safest choice.
•
We also recommend setting a gasoline engine's electronic kill switch to the OFF position in the F/S function for safety reasons.
Updating F/S Settings: If you specify a
F/S setting, the FailSafe data is automatically transmitted once each two minutes.
When you choose the
F/S mode, check that your settings are as desired by turning off the transmitter power switch and verifying that the servos move to the settings that you chose. Be sure to wait at least two minutes after changing the setting
and turning on the receiver power before turning off the transmitter to confirm your changes have been transmitted.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Change the receiver FailSafe command for channel 8 (gasoline engine kill switch) to a preset position.
NOTE: This is one of several functions for which the radio requires confirmation to make a change.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open the BASIC menu, then open
F/S function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If
ADVANCE, to
F/S. to Ch 8.
again.)
Choose Channel to change. (ex: Ch. 8)
Set and confirm fail safe command.
that controls channel 8 to desired
OFF position.
for 1 second to store.
Repeat as desired.
Close.
Wait two minutes and confirm
F/S settings as described above.
Read below for information on Battery FailSafe.
Adjust
END POINTs to gain proper F/S responses if needed: see p. 32.
Adjust SUB-TRIM to gain proper F/S responses if needed: see p. 41.
Battery FailSafe (
F/S): a second battery low warning feature (separate from the transmitter low voltage warning). When the airborne battery voltage drops below approximately 3.8V, the PCM receiver’s battery F/S function moves the throttle to a predetermined position. When the Battery
F/S function is activated, your engine will move to idle (if you haven't set a position) or a preset position. You should immediately land. You may temporarily reset the Battery
F/S function by moving the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
to idle. You will have about 30 seconds of throttle control before the battery function reactivates.
Adjustability:
•
NOR F/S setting for throttle results in Battery F/S going to the servo position reached by moving T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
to the bottom with T
RIM
L
EVER
centered;
•
POS F/S setting for throttle results in Battery F/S also going to the same throttle servo position as the regular F/S.
If using a 6V (5-cell) receiver battery, it is very likely that your battery will be rapidly running out of charge before battery FailSafe takes over. It is not a good idea to count on battery FailSafe to protect your model at any time, but especially when using a 5-cell battery.
43
ACRO ADVANCE MENU FUNCTIONS:
Aircraft wing types (
ACRO/GLID):
There are 3 basic wing types in aircraft models:
•
Simple. Model uses one aileron servo (or multiple servos on a Y-harness into a single receiver channel) and has a tail.
This is the default setup and requires no specialized wing programming.
•
Twin Aileron Servos. Model uses 2 aileron servos and has a tail. see Twin Aileron Servos.
•
Tail-less model (flying wing). Model uses 2 wing servos working together to create both roll and pitch control. see
ELEVON.
Twin Aileron Servos (with a tail) ( ACRO/GLID): Many current generation models use two aileron servos, plugged into two separate receiver channels. (If your model is a flying wing without separate elevators, see ELEVON, p. 48.)
Benefits:
•
Ability to adjust each servo's center and end points for perfectly matched travel.
•
Redundancy, for example in case of a servo failure or mid-air collision.
•
Ease of assembly and more torque per surface by not requiring torque rods for a single servo to drive 2 surfaces.
•
Having more up aileron travel than down travel for straighter rolls – aileron differential. (see glossary for definition.)
Using the two ailerons not only as ailerons but also as flaps, in which case they are called flaperons.
•
Set a negative percentage to reverse the operation of one of the servos.
Options:
•
5-channel receiver? Set up AIL-2 (see p. 47) prior to continuing with FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF.
•
FLAPERON:
•
Uses CH6 for the second servo (see
AIL-2 to use CH5.)
•
Allows flap action as well as aileron action from the ailerons.
•
Provides FLAP-TRIM function to adjust the neutral point of the flaperons for level flight.
•
•
Also allows aileron differential in its own programming (instead of activating
Aileron Differential (
AIL-DIFF):
AIL-DIFF).
•
Uses CH7 for the 2nd servo (see
AIL-2 to use CH5.)
•
Leaves CH6 free for flap operation, such as flaperon and flap action together, in AIRBRAKE. (see p. 55).
•
Allows for more up aileron travel than down for straighter rolls.
You will need to choose which is the better choice for your model's setup –
FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF. If you need the ailerons to also operate as flaps, you most likely want to use
FLAPERON. If your model has 2 aileron servos and flaps, then AIL-DIFF is probably the easiest choice. (For details on setting up a complex aerobatic plane, such as one with 4 wing servos using
full span ailerons and full span flaps, as well as
AIRBRAKE/crow and other features, please visit our FAQ at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
Many other setup examples are also available at this location.)
NOTE: Only one of the three wing-type functions (
FLAPERON, AIL-DIFF, and ELEVON) can be used at a time. All three functions cannot be activated simultaneously. To activate a different wing type, the first must be deactivated.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
De-activate FLAPERON so that AIL-DIFF or
ELEVON can be activated.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open the FLAPERON function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.)
De-activate the function.
Close function.
Set up
AIL-DIFF (see p. 47) or ELEVON (see p. 48).
to
FLAPERON. to MIX.
to INH.
44
Using
FLAPERON (ACRO/GLID):
The
FLAPERON mixing function uses one servo on each of the two ailerons, and uses them for both aileron and flap function. For flap effect, the ailerons raise/lower simultaneously.
Of course, aileron function (moving in opposite directions) is also performed.
Once
FLAPERON is activated, any time you program CH6 or “flap” (ie. FLAP-ELEVATOR mixing), the radio commands both servos to operate as flaps. The amount of travel available as flaps is independently adjustable in FLAPERON. A trimming feature is also available (see FLAP-TRIM) to adjust both neutral positions together for straight-and-level flight or slight increases/decreases of the flap angle. END POINT and SUB-TRIM both still adjust each servo individually.
Adjustability:
•
Each aileron servo's up travel can be set separate from its down travel, creating aileron differential. (See example).
•
Each aileron servo's travel when actuated as a flap is separately adjustable.
•
AIL2 can be utilized to use a 5-channel receiver and still have flaperons. NOTE: The AIL2 function only commands the channel 5 servo to operate with the aileron servo as ailerons, and to obey the primary flap control (travel adjusted in
FLAP-TRIM.) It does not provide full flap mix capability as when using a 6+ channel receiver and channel 6.
NOTE: Activating flaperons only makes the ailerons work as ailerons and tells the radio how far you want them to move as flaps IF you then activate other programming that moves them as flaps.
FLAP-TRIM is the flap-trimming feature that allows the flaps to move in reaction to the channel 6 control. It is meant only for trimming the flaps' center but can also be used as full flap control. (See p. 46).
AIRBRAKE is a feature that drops flaperons as flaps, and also compensates with elevator if desired. (See p. 55).
FLAP-ELEVATOR would add elevator mixing into the flap movement from the flap dial after FLAP-TRIM is activated.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Activate twin aileron servos,
FLAPERON.
Input 10% less down travel than up travel (aileron differential) within the
FLAPERON programming. (Decrease right
aileron’s down travel to
90%, decrease
left aileron's down travel to
90%.)
Adjust total flap travel available to
50% of aileron travel available.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open the
FLAPERON function.
Activate the function.
Optional: adjust the up/down travel separately for the 2 servos.(Ex: 90% down.)
Optional: adjust the aileron's travel so they move as flaps. (Ex: each servo flap travel to
50%.)
Close menu.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to FLAPERON.
*
A
A
ILERON
ILERON
to to
50%.
-50%.
S
S
TICK
TICK
.
.
to to
90%.
90%.
Set FLAP-TRIM: see p. 46.
Set up
AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 55.
Mix flaperon's flap motion to another inboard flap (plugged into aux1): see p. 54.
View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com/faq/faq-9c.html
* If you receive an error message that
OTHER WING MIXING IS ON, you must deactivate AIL-DIFF or ELEVON. see p. 44.
45
Using
FLAP-TRIM (camber) to adjust flaperons: (ACRO/GLID)
FLAP-TRIM assigns the primary flaperon control [defaults to VR(A)] to allow trimming in flight of the flap action of flaperons. (Note: even if FLAP-TRIM is made active with AIL-DIFF,
it will not have any effect. The ONLY function that allows control of the ailerons as flaps in the
AIL-DIFF configuration is AIRBRAKE.) Most modelers use AIRBRAKE, or programmable mixes, to move the flaps to a specified position via movement of a switch.
FLAP-TRIM may also be used as the primary flap control in flight. By doing so, you can assign CH6 to a 3-position switch, with a "spoileron", neutral, and "flaperon" position, and even adjust the percentage traveled as flaperon/spoileron by changing the Flap Trim travel. (Note that there is only one setting, not independent settings for up and down travel.)
Add
FLAP-TRIM to allow the model's ailerons to be trimmed together as flaps at any time during the flight, with a maximum travel of 5% of the total flap travel set in
FLAPERON.
Where next?
Open the
FLAP-TRIM function.
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to FLAP-TRIM.
The function is automatically activated with FLAPERON; however, the default travel is 0.
Adjust the travel available to the flaperons when turning the CH6 D
IAL
.
(Ex: 5%).
Optional: Use as total flap control.
Reassign CH6’s primary control in
AUX-CH to your desired flap control.
(Ex: right slider)
to to to
5%.
50%.
to
AUX-CH.
CH6. to
Close menu.
Adjust individual servo's
SUB-TRIMs: see p. 41 and END POINTs: see p. 32.
Set up
AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 55 and ELEV-FLAP mix: see p. 54.
Mix flaperon's flap movement to an additional inboard flap (plugged into aux1): see p. 54.
View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
46
Using Aileron Differential ( AIL-DIFF) (ACRO/GLID):
CH7
CH1
Aileron differential is primarily used on 3-servo wings, with one servo operating inboard flap(s) on CH6, and
AIL-DIFF controlling proper aileron operation of 2 aileron servos, plugged into CH1 and CH7. The ailerons can
not be moved like flaps when using
AIL-DIFF, except if
using
AIRBRAKE (see p. 55.) (Note that even if you make
FLAP-TRIM active while using AIL-DIFF, it will not have
any effect. ONLY
AIRBRAKE controls the ailerons as
flaps in the
AIL-DIFF configuration .)
Activate twin aileron servos using
AIL-DIFF.
Note that the function defaults to no difference in down travel vs. up travel. If you want differential travel, simply adjust each side. (Ex: 90%)
Open the
AIL-DIFF function.
Activate the function.
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to AIL-DIFF. *
Where next?
Optional: adjust the up/down travel separately for the 2 servos. (Ex: adjust to
100%.)
A
A
ILERON
ILERON
S
S
TICK
TICK
.
.
Close menu.
Adjust individual servo's
SUB-TRIMs: see p. 41 and END POINTs: see p. 32.
Set up
AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 55.
Set up ELEV-FLAP mix (only if model has a flap servo in CH6): see p. 54.
Set up SNAP-ROLL Function: see p. 51.
View additional model setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
to
90%.
to 90%.
*If you receive an error message that
OTHER WING MIXING IS ON, you must deactivate ELEVON or FLAPERON. see p. 44.
Using Twin Aileron Servos with a 5-channel receiver, AAIILL--22 ( ACRO/GLID):
AIL-2 allows FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF with a 5-channel receiver. AIL-2 only tells the radio that you are using CH5 and CH6, not CH6 or CH7, as the second servo in
FLAPERON or
AIL-DIFF. You still must activate and set up the FLAPERON/AIL-DIFF function.
Note that selecting
CH5&6 does NOT free up CH6 to be used for other functions when using a receiver with more than 5 channels. Both 5 and 6 are dedicated to the FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF programming. [This is beneficial with four aileron servos that need to have their end points or sub-trims set separately. CH1, CH5 and CH6 are already fully set up to operate as ailerons. Mix CH7 or CH8 (the second aileron servo on the other side) into ailerons to function properly.]
Aircraft tail types (
ACRO/GLID):
Adjust the second aileron servo output from
CH6or7 to channels CH5&6.
Allows twin aileron servo operation with a 5-channel receiver.
Open the PARAMETER submenu.
Select AIL-2 and change to CH5&6.
for 1 second.
(If advance, again.) to PARAMETER.
to CH5&6.
Where next?
Close menu.
Finish setting up
FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF. see Twin Aileron Servos: p. 41.
View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
47
There are 4 basic tail types in aircraft models:
•
Simple. Model uses one elevator servo and one rudder servo (or multiple servos on a Y-harness). This is the default.
•
Dual Elevator servos. Model uses 2 elevator servos. see
AILEVATOR (ACRO) see p. 49.
•
Tail-less model. Model uses 2 wing servos together to create roll and pitch control. see
ELEVON (ACRO/GLID). see p. 48.
•
V-TAIL. Model uses 2 surfaces, at an angle, together to create yaw and pitch control. see V-TAIL (ACRO/GLID). see p. 50.
Note: Only one of the three tail-type functions ( AILEVATOR, V-TAIL, and ELEVON) can be used at a time. The radio provides a warning and will not allow the activation of another tail type until the first is deactivated. An error message of
OTHER
WING MIXING IS ON will display. (See the wing type example on page 44.)
Using
ELEVON (ACRO/GLID): used with delta wings, flying wings, and other tailless aircraft that combine aileron and elevator functions, using two servos, one on each elevon. The aileron/elevator responses of each servo can be adjusted independently. This is also popular for ground model use, such as tanks, which drive two motors together for forward, and one motor forward/one backward for turning.
Adjustability:
•
Requires use of CH1 and CH2.
•
Independently adjustable aileron travel allows aileron differential.
Independently adjustable elevator travel allows for differences in up vs. down travel.
NOTE: If ELEVON is active, you cannot activate FLAPERON, AIL-DIFF, or AILEVATOR. An error message OTHER WING MIXING
IS ON displays and you must deactivate the last function to activate ELEVON.
NOTE: Be sure to move the elevator and aileron sticks to full deflection during setup. If large travels are specified, when the A
ILERON
and E
LEVATOR
S
TICKS
are moved at the same time the controls may bind or run out of travel.
(For details on setting up a complex aerobatic plane, such as “space shuttle” style controls, please visit
www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
Many other setup examples are also available at this location.)
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Activate ELEVON.
Adjust aileron down travel to
90% of up travel, creating aileron differential.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open the ELEVON function.
Activate the function.
Optional: adjust the up/down travel separately for the servos as ailerons.
(Ex: down to
90%.)
Optional: adjust the elevator travel of each servo. (Ex: right servo elev. travel to
98%, left to 105%.)
Close menu.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to ELEVON.
A
A
ILERON
ILERON
to to
98%.
S
105%.
S
TICK
TICK
.
to to
90%.
90%.
Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs: see p. 41 and END POINTs: see p. 32.
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (D/R,EXP): see p. 35.
View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html
48
Dual Elevator Servos (with a rudder) ( AILEVATOR) (ACRO/GLID): Many models use two elevator servos, plugged in separate receiver channels. (Flying wings without a separate aileron control use ELEVON. V-shaped tail models use V-TAIL, p. 50.
Benefits:
•
Ability to adjust each servo's center and end points for perfectly matched travel.
•
Ease of assembly, not requiring torque rods for a single servo to drive 2 surfaces.
•
Elevators acting also as ailerons for extreme stunt flying or more realistic jet flying (optional).
•
Redundancy, for example in case of a servo failure or mid-air collision.
Adjustability:
•
CH2 and CH8 only. (With programmable mixing, could utilize CH5 as the 2nd elevator servo.
See www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html
for examples.)
THROTTLE-NEEDLE uses CH8 and cannot be active simultaneously.
•
Direction of each servo's travel may be reversed in REVERSE or the set percentages may be reversed here.
•
Elevator travels independently adjustable (both directions and percent).
•
Optional action as ailerons (defaults to 50% response). This response cannot be activated/deactivated in flight.
Setting
AIL1 and 2 to 0 disables this feature. Note: if you want this, but on/off with a switch, set AIL1 and 2 to 0 here, and use 2 mixes –
AIL-to-ELEV and AIL-to-AUX2 (link/trim off, assign a switch)– to get aileron action from the elevator servos when the assigned switch is on. See p. 59.
(For details on setting up a complex aerobatic plane, such as one with 4 wing servos, full span ailerons/flaps,
AIRBRAKE/crow etc,
please visit
www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
Many other setups are also available.)
The AILEVATOR mixing function uses one servo on each of the two elevators, and combines the elevator function with the aileron function (unless aileron travel is set to 0). For aileron effect, the elevators are raised and lowered opposite of one another in conjunction with the ailerons.
Once
AILEVATOR is activated, unless you zero out the aileron figures (see below), any time you move your ailerons or any programming moves your ailerons (ie. RUDDER-AILERON mixing), the radio automatically commands both elevator servos to also operate as ailerons. To deactivate this action, simply set the 2 aileron travel settings to 0 in the AILEVATOR function.
This way the elevators will work only as elevators.
If using the elevators as ailerons as well, be sure to move the elevator/aileron stick while checking the servo motions. If a large travel is specified, when the sticks are moved at the same time, controls may bind or run out of travel.)
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Activate twin elevator servos.
Deactivate the elevator-acting-asailerons portion of this function.
Note: Depending upon your model's geometry, you may need to reverse one servo or set a negative percentage here.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open the
AILEVATOR function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to
AILEVATOR.
Activate the function.
Optional: adjust up/down travel when operating as ailerons. (Ex:
0.)
Optional: adjust total elevator travel of each servo. (Ex: right servo elevator travel to
98%, left to 96%.)
Close menu.
to
0%.
to 0%.
to to
98%.
96%.
Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs: see p. 41 and END POINTs: see p. 32.
Set up Twin Aileron Servos: see p. 44.
Set up
AIRBRAKE mix: see p. 55.
49
Using
V-TAIL (ACRO/GLID):
V-TAIL mixing is used with v-tail aircraft so that both elevator and rudder functions are combined for the two tail surfaces. Both elevator and rudder travel can be adjusted independently on each surface.
NOTE: If V-TAIL is active, you cannot activate ELEVON or AILEVATOR functions. If one of these functions is active, an error message will be displayed and you must deactivate the last function prior to activating ELEVON. see the wing example on page 44.
NOTE: Be sure to move the elevator and rudder sticks regularly while checking the servo motions. If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out of travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.
Adjustability:
•
Requires use of CH2 and CH4.
•
Independently adjustable travels allow for differences in servo travels.
•
Rudder differential is not available. (To create rudder differential, set RUD1 and 2 to 0, then use two programmable mixes, RUD-ELE and RUD-RUD, setting different percents for up and down. These are your new rudder travels. Trim and link off, switch assignment null so you can’t accidentally turn off rudder. see
PROG.MIX, p. 59.)
(For details on setting up a complex plane, such as one with a v-tail AND a separate steerable nosewheel, please visit our
FAQ at
www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
Many other setup examples are also available at this location.)
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Activate
V-TAIL.
Adjust left elevator servo to 95% travel to match to right servo's travel.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open the
V-TAIL function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to V-TAIL.
Activate the function.
optional: adjust the travels separately for the 2 servos as elevators. (Ex: set left to
95%.)
Close menu.
to
95%.
Repeat as necessary for other servos.
Adjust END POINTs: see p. 41 and SUB-TRIMs: see p. 32.
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential
(D/R,EXP): see p. 35.
Set up
ELEV-FLAP mix: see p. 54.
View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
50
Snap Rolls at the flick of a switch ( SNAP-ROLL) (ACRO/GLID):
This function allows you to execute snap rolls by flipping a switch, providing the same input every time. It also removes the need to change dual rates on the 3 channels prior to performing a snap, as SNAP-ROLL always takes the servos to the same position, regardless of dual rates, inputs held during the snap, etc.
Note: Every aircraft snaps differently due to its C.G., control throws, moments, etc.
Some models snap without aileron; others snap on elevator alone. Most models snap most precisely with a combination of all 3 surfaces. Additionally, rate of speed and acceleration when using the snap switch will affect how the model snaps. For information on using gyros with airplanes for cleaner precision maneuvers, such as snaps and spins without over rotation, see p. 64.
Adjustability:
•
Travel: Adjust the amount of elevator, aileron and rudder travel automatically applied.
•
Range: -120 to +120 on all 3 channels. Default is 100% of range of all 3 channels.
•
Directions: Up to 4 separate snaps may be set up, one for each of the 4 direction choices (up/right, down/right, up/left, down/left). Each snap is fully adjustable regarding travels and direction on each of the 3 channels.
Note: for simplicity, the radio refers to snaps that use “UP” or positive elevator as “ U” or “UP” snaps. This is more commonly referred to as a positive or inside snap. “ D” or “DOWN” snaps are more commonly referred to as negative or outside snaps.
•
R/U = Right positive R/D = Right negative L/U = Left positive L/D = Left negative snap roll
•
Assignment of the 2 switches (
DIR-SW1/2) to change snap directions is fully adjustable and optional. If you wish to
have only one snap, leave the switches as
NULL. (If assigned, SW1 = up/down, SW2 = left/right.)
•
Caution: it is critical that you remember if you assigned switches to select the three additional snaps.
•
For example, assign S
WITCH
A for U/D snap direction, and then also assign S
WITCH
A for elevator dual rates. While flying on elevator low rate (S
WITCH
A D
OWN
) you pull your snap S
WITCH
. The model will:
• use the throws set in the snap programming (the low rate elevator has no effect); and
• be a down (negative/outside) snap, not an up (positive/inside) snap.
•
Both of these may come as a great surprise and risk crashing if you are unprepared.
•
Safety Switch ( SAFE-MOD): a safety may be set up on your landing gear S
WITCH
, preventing accidental snap rolls while the landing gear is down. The safety switch is turned on and off with the landing gear S
WITCH
.
•
ON: the safety mechanism is activated when the landing gear S
WITCH
is in the same position as at the time this feature is changed to
ON. Snap rolls will not be commanded even if the snap roll S
WITCH
is turned on with the gear
S
WITCH
in this position. When the landing gear S
WITCH
is moved to the opposite position, snap rolls may be commanded.
•
OFF: activates the safety mechanism in the opposite position from the ON function.
•
FREE: the safety mechanism is completely turned off. Snaps can be commanded regardless of the gear S
WITCH
P
OSITION
.
Note: The location of the safety switch always follows channel 5. If channel 5 is reassigned to switch C, for example, switch
C is now the safety. If channel 5 is nulled or used as the second aileron servo, the safety function will not be available.
•
Trainer Safety: SNAP-ROLL is automatically disabled when the trainer function is activated.
51
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Activate SNAP-ROLL. Adjust elevator travel to 55%, rudder travel to 120% in the right/up snap. Activate SAFE-MOD so snaps can not be performed when gear is down.
Adjust rudder travel in the left/down snap to 105%.
(Note: using negative percents can change any of the 4 snaps’ directions.
For example, change snap 1 to
“down” by changing the elevator percent to –
100%.)
Where next?
STEPS:
Open the SNAP-ROLL function.
Activate the function.
Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex: elevator to 55%, rudder to 120%.)
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to
SNAP-ROLL. to OFF or ON. to
55%.
to 120%.
Optional: Activate
SAFE-MOD. [Ex: ON
when S
WITCH
E (9CA) or G (9CH) is down, meaning snap function is deactivated when that switch is in the down position.]
Optional: Assign switches to up/down and left/right. (Ex: Change to the left/down snap and adjust rudder to
105%.) snap switch.
Notice mix reading is still OFF.
E or G down.
Notice MIX reading changes to ON.
to A.
to B.
A down B down.
Repeat steps above to set percentages.
Close menu.
Set up programmable mixes: see p. 53.
View additional setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
52
MIXES: the backbone of nearly every function
Mixes are special programs within the radio that command one or more channels to act together with input from only one source, such as a stick, slider or knob.
There are a variety of types of mixes.
Types:
•
Linear: Most mixes are linear. A 100% linear mix tells the slave servo to do exactly what the master servo is doing, using 100% of the slave channel’s range to do so. An example is
FLAPERON – when aileron stick is moved, the flap servo is told to move exactly the same amount. A 50% linear mix would tell the slave servo, for example, to move to 50% of its range when the master’s control is moved 100%. (see p. 54.)
•
Offset: An OFFSET mix is a special type of linear mix. When the mix is turned on (usually a flip of a switch), the slave servo is moved a set percent of its range. An example of this is AIRBRAKE – moving flaps, flaperons, and elevator all to a set position at the flip of a switch. (see p. 55.)
•
Curve: Curve mixes are mostly used in helicopters, but may also be used in airplanes and gliders. An example is
THROTTLE-
NEEDLE mixing, where the in-flight needle’s servo is moved, changing the mixture, as the throttle servo is moved. (see p. 56.)
•
Delay: Delay mixes are part of a few very special functions that make the servo move to its desired range more slowly.
THROTTLE DELAY (simulates turbine engines, p. 57) and the elevator delay in AIRBRAKE are two examples of this
(see p. 55).
DELAY in HELI (see p. 87) is another example that slows the servo movement to the trim settings for the other conditions. The 9C does not offer fully programmable delay mixes.
Essentially every feature in the radio’s programming is really a mix, with all assignments/programming set up and ready to use. Additionally, the 9C ACRO and GLID programs both provide 5 linear and 2 curve fully-programmable mixes (HELI provides two linear and one curve) that allow you to set up special mixes to resolve flight difficulties, activate additional functions, etc.
Let’s look quickly at a few examples that are features we’ve already covered. This may help to clarify the mix types and the importance of mixes.
Additional examples:
•
Exponential is a preprogrammed curve mix that makes the servos’ response more (+) or less (-) sensitive around center stick (works in conjunction with dual rate, a linear mix that adjusts the total range). see D/R,EXP, p. 35.
•
IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT are two OFFSET pre-programmed mixes. These tell the throttle servo, when below a certain point, to move toward idle an additional set percentage to help close the carburetor. see p. 33.
•
ELEV-TO-FLAP mixing is a pre-programmed linear mix to move the flaps proportionally to elevator control, helping the model loop even tighter than it can on elevator alone. (see p. 54.)
•
THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing is a curve mix (like PROG.MIX 6 and 7) for proper in-flight needle setup. (see p. 56.)
•
THROTTLE DELAY mixing is a pre-programmed delay mix that slows down the response of the CH3 servo. (see p. 57.)
Next, we'll get an in-depth look at some pre-programmed mixes (mixes whose channels are predefined by Futaba for
simplicity) we’ve not covered yet, and last, look at the fully-programmable mix types.
53
ELEV-FLAP mixing (ACRO/GLID):
ELEV-FLAP mixing is the first pre-programmed mix we’ll cover. This mix makes the flaps drop or rise whenever the E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
is moved. It is most commonly used to make tighter pylon turns or squarer corners in maneuvers. In most cases, the flaps droop (are lowered) when up elevator is commanded.
Adjustability:
•
Rate: –100% (full up flap) to +100 (full down flap), with a default of +50% (one-half of the flap range is achieved when the E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
is pulled to provide full up elevator.)
•
Switch: fully assignable, or null, so mix is always active.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Activate
ELEV-FLAP mixing. Adjust flap travel to
0% flaps with negative elevator (push) and 45% flaps with positive elevator.
STEPS:
Open the
ELEV-FLAP function.
Activate the function.
Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex: 0%, to
45%.)
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to ELEV-FLAP.
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
. to
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
. to 45%.
Set switch assignment to null so the mix is always active.
Where next?
Optional: change S
WITCH
control. Ex: change to
NULL so flaps only respond
to E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
input.
to NULL.
Close menu.
Adjust flaperons’ flap travel available ( FLAPERON): see p. 45.
Set up
AIRBRAKE (crow/butterfly): see p. 55.
Set up programmable mixes (ex:
FLAP-ELEVATOR): see p. 59.
View additional setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
54
AIRBRAKE/BUTTERFLY (crow) mixing (ACRO/GLID):
Like FLAPERON and AILEVATOR, AIRBRAKE is one function that is really made up of a series of pre-programmed mixes all done for you within the radio. AIRBRAKE (often called “crow” or BUTTERFLY - see GLID, p. 69 for details) simultaneously moves the flap(s) (if installed), twin ailerons (if installed) and elevator(s), and is usually used to make steep descents or to limit increases in airspeed in dives.
This function is often used even on models without flaps as an easy way to use the flaperons and FLAP-ELEVATOR mixing together.
Adjustability:
•
Activation: Proportional by moving the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
, or set positions by flipping S
WITCH
C (
ACRO only).
•
Lnear (Inversely proportional to T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
): provides a proportional increase in amount of AIRBRAKE action as
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
is lowered (when S
WITCH
C (
ACRO) or A (GLID) is in down position). Provides gradually more
AIRBRAKE as you slow the engine. Includes selectable stick position where AIRBRAKE begins, gradually increasing to the same setting as
MANUAL as the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
is lowered. If you would like to have the airbrake be directly proportional to throttle stick, you will need to reverse the
THR-REV function. Note that this changes the throttle stick direction for all mmodels. See page 31 for instructions.
•
MANUAL (ACRO only): Provides AIRBRAKE response immediately upon switch movement, going to a pre-set travel on each active channel without any means of in-flight adjustment. ( MANUAL option not available in GLID modes.)
•
Delayed reaction: You can suppress sudden changes in your model's attitude when
AIRBRAKE is activated by setting the delay (
DELAY-ELE) item, to slow down the elevator response, allowing the flaps/ailerons/elevator to all reach their desired end point together. A setting of 100% slows the servo to take approximately one second to travel the prescribed distance.
•
Adjustable in flight: Using the elevator trim lever in flight will adjust the elevator settings in your airbrake rather than adjusting the model's actual elevator trim. This allows easy adjustment for any ballooning while in flight. When the airbrake switch is moved to off the trims are again adjusting the normal elevator trim.
•
Channels controlled: Elevator(s), twin ailerons and flap(s) may be set independently in AIRBRAKE, including set to 0 to have no effect.
•
Twin aileron servos: If FLAPERON, ELEVON and AIL-DIFF functions are inhibited, then AIL1 and AIL2 settings will have no effect.
•
If
FLAPERON is active, the travel of the ailerons can be independently adjusted for the servos plugged into CH1 and CH6. The flap choice has no effect on the flaperons.
•
If AIL-DIFF is active, then CH1 and CH7 may be independently adjusted.
•
Normally both ailerons are raised equally in AIRBRAKE, and the elevator motion is set to maintain trim when the ailerons rise. Different amounts may be set for each aileron to correct for torque reactions and other unique characteristics of the model.
Be sure you understand what dropping ailerons will do when in AIRBRAKE/BUTTERFLY. Along with creating an enormous amount of drag (desirable for spot landings), this also creates "wash-in", a higher angle of attack where the ailerons are, and encourages tip stalling. If you are using this for aerobatic performance and not "sudden stops", consider raising the ailerons and dropping the flaps instead as shown in the diagram above.
•
Twin elevator servos:
•
If AILEVATOR is active, the AIL1 and AIL2 settings still only affect FLAPERON or AIL-DIFF servos, NOT the elevator servos. (they would have the AIL3 and AIL4 settings.)
55
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Activate AIRBRAKE on a FLAPERON model. Adjust the flaperon travel to 75%, with negative elevator (push) of 25%.
Where next?
STEPS:
Confirm
Open the
FLAPERON is active.
AIRBRAKE function.
Activate the function.
Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex:
Ailerons each 75%, Elevator –25%.)
INPUTS:
see FLAPERON instructions.
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to
AIRBRAKE.
Switch C in up position.
to OFF. to
75%.
to –25%.
to
75%.
to 25%.
Optional: delay how quickly the elevator servo responds.
Optional: change the mixing from full amount upon switch to proportional to the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
’s proximity to idle.
T
to Lnear (0%).a
HROTTLE
S
TICK
to desired
0 point.
for 1 sec., until beeps
(display changes if new setting is different from prior setting).
Close menu.
Adjust flaperons’ total flap travel available ( FLAPERON): see p. 44.
Set up ELEV-FLAP mixing: see p. 54.
Set up programmable mixes, for example, FLAP-ELEVATOR: see p. 59.
View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
56
THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing (ACRO/HELI):
THROTTLE-NEEDLE is a pre-programmed mix that automatically moves an in-flight mixture servo (CH8) in response to the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
inputs for perfect engine tuning at all throttle settings. This function is particularly popular with contest pilots who fly in a large variety of locations, needing regular engine tuning adjustments, and requiring perfect engine response at all times and in all maneuvers. Also popular to minimize flooding at idle of inverted engine installations or installations with a high tank position.
Not needed for fuel injection engines, which do this automatically.
Adjustability:
•
Five-point curve allows adjustment of engine mixture at varied throttle settings.
•
The in-flight mixture servo must connect to receiver CH8.
•
In-flight mixture servo may also be used as a second servo for tuning a twin.
•
Throttle cut feature also moves the in flight needle servo.
•
The CH8 knob adjusts the high throttle mixture (may be deactivated. see
AUX-CH).
•
Because both use CH8, this function cannot be used simultaneously with
AILEVATOR.
•
An acceleration ( ACCE) function (ACRO only) helps the engine compensate for sudden, large amounts of throttle input by making the mixture suddenly richer, then easing it back to the proper adjustment for that throttle setting. This function requires some adjustment to best fit your engine and your flying style. Adjust engine’s response until no hesitation occurs on rapid throttle input.
•
Separate curves are available (
HELI only) for normal, idle-ups 1 and 2 combined, and idle-up 3. Immediately below
THR-NEEDLE the radio displays the curve you are editing; ex: >NORML; and then which condition is currently active by your switches ex: ( ID1/2). Note that you can edit the mix for a different condition without being in that condition, to allow editing without having to shut off the helicopter’s engine every time. Be sure you are editing the proper curve by checking the name after the > and not the one in parentheses.
GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:
Activate THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing.
Adjust the points as follows to resolve a slight lean midrange problem:
Open the THROTTLE-NEEDLE function.
Activate the function.
for 1 second.
to
(If basic, again.)
THROTTLE-NEEDLE.
1: 40%
2: 45%
3: 65%
4: 55%
5: 40%
HELI only. Select the condition to edit.
Adjust the travels as needed to match your engine by slowly moving the stick to each of the 5 points, then adjusting the percentage at that point until the engine is properly tuned.
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
.
to
40%.
until POINT 2 is highlighted. to
45%.
as needed.
ACRO only. Optional: increase mixture
when throttle is applied rapidly-
ACCE.
(see above for details.)
HELI only: set curves for other conditions.
T
to POINT 3. to POINT 4. to
POINT 5. to to to
65%.
55%.
40%
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
to idle.
HROTTLE
S
as needed.
TICK
full open quickly.
to condition name.
to next condition to edit.
Repeat above steps as needed.
Close menu.
Where next?
Set up
THROTTLE DELAY to imitate a jet engine’s lag: see p. 57.
Adjust throttle and Ch8
END POINTs: see p. 32.
Set up programmable mixes, for example, AILERON-to-RUDDER: see p. 59.
View additional model setups on the www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
57
THROTTLE DELAY (ACRO):
The THROTTLE DELAY function is used to slow the response of the throttle servo to simulate the slow response of a turbine engine. A 40% delay setting corresponds to about a one-second delay, while a 100% delay takes about eight seconds to respond. For helicopters, see
DELAYS, p. 87.
This function may also be used to create a “slowed servo” on a channel other than throttle. This is accomplished by plugging the desired servo (Ex: gear doors) into CH3 (THR), throttle into an auxiliary channel such as 8, and then using some creative mixes.
Please see our Frequently Asked Questions area at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html
for this specific example.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Activate THROTTLE DELAY for a ductedfan replica of a turbine-powered aircraft. Slow the servo response by one second.
Where next?
STEPS:
Open the THROTTLE DELAY function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to THROTTLE DELAY.
Activate the function.
Adjust the RATE to match the desired servo speed. (Ex: 40%.) to 40%.
Close menu.
Set up THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing: see p. 56.
Adjust throttle’s
END POINT: see p. 32.
Adjust throttle exponential (
D/R,EXP): see p. 35.
Set up AILEVATOR: see p. 49.
Set up programmable mixes, for example, RUDDER-AILERON: see p. 59.
View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
58
LINEAR PROGRAMMABLE MIXES ( PROG.MIX1-5):
Your 9C contains five separate linear programmable mixes ( ACRO and GLID. HELI has 2). (Note that mixer #6-7’s mixing
RATEs are set with a 5-point curve. see CURVE MIXES, p. 62.)
There are a variety of reasons you might want to use these mixes. A few are listed here. All of the adjustable parameters are listed below, but don’t let them scare you. For your first few times experimenting with mixes, just turn on the default mixes, adjust them how you think they need to be, then use the servo screen to check and see if you were correct. As with all functions, a sample setup follows, step by step, to assist you.
Sample reasons to use linear programmable mixes:
•
To correct bad tendencies of the aircraft (such as rolling in response to rudder input).
•
To operate 2 or more servos for a single axis (such as two rudder servos).
•
To automatically correct for a particular action (such as lowering elevator when flaps are lowered).
•
To operate a second channel in response to movement in a first channel (such as increasing the amount of smoke oil in response to more throttle application, but only when the smoke switch is active).
•
To turn off response of a primary control in certain circumstances (such as simulating one engine flaming-out on a twin, or throttle-assisted rudder turns, also with a twin).
Adjustability:
•
ACRO/GLID Defaults: The 5 programmable mixes default to the most frequently used mixes for simplicity. If you want to use one of these mixes, simply select that mix number so that the master and slave servos are already selected for you. ( HELI mixes default to ail-to-rudd and elev-to-pitch.)
•
PROG.MIX1
aileron-to-rudder for coordinated turns
•
PROG.MIX2
elevator-to-flap
•
PROG.MIX3
flap-to-elevator
•
PROG.MIX4
throttle-to-rudder
•
PROG.MIX5
rudder-to-aileron for tighter loops to compensate pitching with flaps ground handling compensation roll coupling compensation
•
Channels available to mix: All five mixes may use any combination of CH1-8. (CH9 is not proportional and cannot be mixed.) Offset and dials may also be set to the master channels. (see below.)
•
Master: the controlling channel. The channel whose movement is followed by the slave channel.
•
Another channel: Most mixes follow a control channel. (Ex: rudder-to-ailerons, 25%, no switch, corrects roll coupling.)
MASTER SLAVE LINK
RUDD AILE ON
TRIM
OFF
SWITCH POSITION
ANY
NULL
RATE
25%
OFFSET
0
•
Offset as master: To create an
OFFSET mix, set the master as OFST. (Ex: move flaperons as flaps 20% of their total throw when S
WITCH
C is in down position.)
MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET
OFST FLAP ON
N/A
C DOWN 20% 0
59
•
Dial as master: To directly effect one servo’s position by moving a dial, set the master as the desired dial.
(Ex: create a second throttle trim on left slider.)
MASTER SLAVE LINK
VR(D) THRO OFF
TRIM
N/A
SWITCH POSITION
ANY
NULL
RATE
5%
OFFSET
0
•
Slave: the controlled channel. The channel that is moved automatically in response to the movement of the master channel. The second channel in a mix’s name (ie aileron-to-rudder).
•
Link: link this programmable mix with other mixes.
Ex: PMIX FLAP-ELEVATOR mixing to correct for ballooning when flaps are lowered, but model has a V-tail. Without
LINK, this mix only moves CH2 elevator when flap is commanded, resulting in a dangerous combination of yaw and roll. With LINK ON, mixing is applied to both CH2 and CH4.
MASTER SLAVE LINK
FLAP ELEV ON
TRIM
OFF
SWITCH POSITION
ANY NULL
RATE
5%
OFFSET
0
•
Trim: master’s trim affects slave. Not displayed if master is not CH 1-4, because 5-9 have no trim. Ex: two rudder servos. With TRIM OFF, rudder trim would bind the two servos. TRIM ON resolves this.
•
On/off choices:
•
S
WITCH
: Any of the positions of any of the 8 switches may be used to activate a mix.
Up&Cntr, Cntr&Dn options allow the mix to be ON in 2 of the 3 positions of a 3-position S
WITCH
.
•
NULL: No S
WITCH
can turn this mix OFF. This mix is active at all times.
•
STk-THR: Turned on/off by
THROTTLE STICK
movement. Trigger point/direction are selectable. Ex: OFST-to-(gear doors) mix to open gear doors at idle, which is only active if throttle is below half.
MASTER SLAVE LINK
OFST AUX2 OFF
TRIM
NO
SWITCH POSITION
STk-THR Stick at ½, for 1 sec.
RATE
100%
OFFSET
0
•
Rate: the percentage of the slave’s range it will move upon maximum input from the master channel. Ex:
RUDDER-
AILERON mix, 50%. Ail range=1”. When rudder is moved full right, ailerons move ½”.
MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET
RUDD AILE OFF OFF
ANY
NULL 50% 0
•
Offset: Offsets the slave’s center relative to the master. Ex: Smoke valve opens wider per throttle servo position when smoke S
WITCH
is
ON. Smoke servo’s neutral is moved down from T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
center to the bottom.
MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET
THRO AUX2 OFF OFF E DOWN 100% 100%
60
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Set up a FLAP-ELEV mix:
ON when S
WITCH
C is in the down position.
No elevator movement when flaps move up (spoilers),
5% elevator movement when flaps move down,
LINK should be ON if model has twin elevator servos. Otherwise, LINK remains OFF.
(Flap has no trim lever, so
TRIM is not
an option.)
Where next?
STEPS:
Open an unused programmable mix.
(Ex: use PROG.MIX3 since it is already set-up for FLAP-ELEVATOR.)
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to PROG.MIX3.
Activate the function.
Choose master and slave channels.
(Ex: no need to change MAS/SLV.) already FLAP already ELEV
Optional: set Master as
OFST or
VR(A-E). See above for details.
to desired choice.
Set
LINK and TRIM as needed.
(Ex: leave available.)
Assign S
LINK OFF, TRIM not
WITCH
and position.
(Ex: change from
G to C, DOWN.)
Optional: set switch to activate mix with T
(See above for details.)
STk-THR to
HROTTLE
S
TICK
.
(If TRIM is available, to
C.
to DOWN.
to
STk-THR.
.)
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
to desired point.
for 1 second to set.
Optional: set switch position to
NULL.
Makes mix active at all times. Not compatible with
STk-THR.
Set rates. (Ex: Lo=
0%, Hi=5%.)
to
NULL.
VR(A)
past center. Leave at
0%.
VR(A) past center. to 5%.
Leave at
0%.
Set OFFSET, if needed. (Ex: 0.)
Close menu.
Adjust servo END POINTs: see p. 32.
Setup dual/triple rates and exponential ( D/R,EXP): see p. 35.
Set up additional programmable mixes, ex:
RUDDER-AILERON: see p. 59.
View numerous additional mix setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
Other Examples:
•
RUD-THR (HELI) mix: When right rudder is applied, additional torque is needed from the motor to drive the tail left. Left rudder requires less torque. A rudder-throttle mix, positive on the left side and negative on the right, adjusts for this.
•
RUD-ELEV (ACRO/GLID) mix: Compensate for pitching up or down when rudder is applied.
•
AIL-RUD mix: Coordinate turns by applying rudder automatically with aileron input. All model types.
•
ELEV-PIT (HELI) mix: compensate for the loss of lift of tilting the model.
61
CURVE PROGRAMMABLE MIXES ( PROG.MIX6, PROG.MIX7):
Your 9C’s ACRO/GLID programs contain two separate curve programmable mixes. HELI contains one. There are a variety of reasons you might want curve mixes — usually where a linear mix doesn’t fit your needs along the whole range. One pre-programmed curve mix is the THROTTLE-NEEDLE function. This curve is adjustable at 5 points, allowing you to adjust the motor’s tuning at 5 points along its RPM range.
One programmable curve mix defaults to RUDDER-AILERON. A linear mix that keeps the model from rolling in knife-edge is probably too much aileron when rudder is applied in level flight. Create a curve mix and set all 5 points to match the linear mix. Inhibit the linear mix, then adjust the curve to get the right response all along the rudder channel’s travel.
Adjustability: for detailed definitions, see Linear Programmable Mixes and Glossary.
•
ACRO Defaults: The 2 programmable curve mixes default to the most frequent choices, but can be set to any channel.
•
PROG.MIX6
rudder-to-aileron
•
PROG.MIX7
rudder-to-elevator for roll coupling compensation for pitch coupling compensation
•
GLID/HELI Defaults:
•
PROG.MIX6
aileron-to-elevator for coordinated turns
•
PROG.MIX7
elevator-to-airbrake for quicker braking ( GLID only)
•
Master: The controlling channel can only be a channel. Cannot be OFFSET or dial.
•
Trim: not available in curve mixes.
•
Offset: not available in curve mixes.
62
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Set up a RUDD-ELEV curve mix on a model that pitches down severely at full rudder and not at all with minimal rudder input, and pitches worse on right rudder than left:
Point 1: 25%
Point 2: 8%
Point 3: 0%
Point 4: 10%
Point 5: 28%
ON when S
WITCH
C is down.
LINK should be ON if model has twin elevator servos. Otherwise, LINK remains OFF.
STEPS:
Open an unused curve programmable mix. (Ex: use PROG.MIX7 since it is already set-up for RUDDER-ELEV.)
Activate the function.
Choose master and slave channels.
(Ex: do not change MAS or SLV).
Set LINK as needed. (Ex: off)
Assign S
WITCH
and position.
(Ex: change from
H to C, DOWN.)
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to PROG.MIX7.
5 times. to
C.
to
DOWN.
Optional: set switch to
STk-THR to
activate mix with T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
.
(See above for details.)
Optional: set switch position to
Makes mix active at all times.
NULL.
to
STk-THR.
throttle to desired point.
for 1 second.
to
POSI. to NULL.
(Note that point 3 is 0%. Otherwise, the elevator would be retrimmed when the mix is active and no rudder input is given.)
Where next?
Set desired percent at the stick points.
(Ex: listed at left.) to
25%.
Repeat for points 2-5.
Close menu.
Adjust servo END POINTs: see p. 32.
Set up AILEVATOR: see p. 49.
Set up linear programmable mixes, ex: RUDDER-to-Aux2 (twin rudder servos): see p. 59, or additional curve mix, ex:
RUDDER-AILERON: see p. 62.
View numerous mix setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html
63
Special Additions, Functions, And Added Equipment Commonly Used On Powered Aircraft
Gyros: Just as torque rotates an aircraft on the runway during take-off, helicopters struggle with torque twisting the model every time throttle is applied. For many years gyroscopes have been used on model helicopters to control this. In competition aerobatics and scale aircraft competition alike, the usefulness of gyros has recently come to light. For in-depth information on gyro types, please see p. 89.
For aerobatics, gyros on rudder and elevator fix over-rotation of snaps and spins as well as tail wagging in stall turns. (Futaba offers a twin-axis gyro, GYA-352, that controls two axes with a single gyro.) For 3D aerobatics (below stall speed, such as torque rolls), heading-hold/AVCS gyros on rudder and elevator dramatically simplify these maneuvers. For scale models, gyros are frequently used to simplify take-offs and landings by keeping the model straight during throttle application.
Always be careful if using a heading-hold/AVCS gyro, as it will correct any change in yaw that is not caused by movement of the rudder (like making a turn with just aileron and elevator). Typically, modelers use headinghold/AVCS settings only for specific maneuvers, such as take-offs and torque rolls, then switch to normal mode or
OFF for the remainder of the flight to avoid this risk.
While the 9C’s
ACRO/GLID programming does not offer gyro-specific programming, simply adjusting the END POINTs of the channel that is used to control the gyro’s gain will adjust the gyro’s performance in flight. For details on gain and other gyro functions, please see the HELI GYRO programming, p. 89.
Retracts: Retractable landing gear is often used on scale models for increased realism and on high performance models to decrease drag. The gear servo is typically plugged into CH5, which defaults to a 2-position switch for simplicity.
Mechanical retracts require the use of a specialized non-proportional retract servo. Retract servos go from full travel one direction to full travel the other direction, then mechanically hold the gear into the locked position. A regular servo used for mechanical retracts will continue to draw full power the entire time, prematurely draining the battery and risking crash of your model. End point will not adjust a retract servo.
Pneumatic (air driven) retracts use a standard servo to control an air valve which directs air into or out of the retract units, moving the gear up or down. Pneumatics are easier to install but require added maintenance of the air system.
Gear Doors: Some scale models with retracts also have separate gear doors to cover the scale gear. For one example of how to operate the gear doors separately from the retracts, please visit our website: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
Smoke Systems: Many scale and aerobatic models use smoke systems to provide increased realism or a more impressive demonstration. There are many smoke systems available, with varying types of control. Most use a servo to increase/decrease the flow of smoke fluid into the specialized smoke muffler. The oil is heated in the muffler, creating smoke.
It is a good practice to set up a “safety” that shuts off the smoke oil if the throttle is lowered below half-stick. For a detailed example of a smoke system setup, please visit our website: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
Kill Switches: For safety reasons, it is strongly recommended that an electronic kill switch be installed in all gasolinepowered aircraft. In case of any type of in-flight problem (such as prop failure, exhaust vibrating off, throttle servo failure, radio interference), the modeler can shut the engine off quickly and safely in flight. Additionally, FailSafe ( F/S) settings are recommended to shut the engine off in case of sufficient interference to trigger the PCM FailSafe settings.
Lastly, an electronic kill switch set to “off” prior to the aircraft’s power being shut off adds an additional safety should someone accidentally turn on the mechanical kill switch on the exterior of the model.
Bomb Drops, Paratroopers, and other Released Items: Many sport and scale models include one or more of these fun add-ons. Typically, all are controlled by a simple micro-switch plugged into CH9. The switch is assigned in AUX-CH.
64
GLIDER MODEL FUNCTIONS
Please note that nearly all of the BASIC menu functions are the same for airplane (ACRO setup), sailplane (GLID1FLP/2FLP setups), and helicopter (
HELISWH1/SWH2/SWH4/SR-3/SN-3) setups. The features that are identical refer back to the ACRO chapter. The glider
BASIC menu does not include IDLE-DOWN or THR-CUT.
Note that in all cases where ACRO programming labels channel 3 as throttle, GLID programming labels channel 3 as ARB
(airbrake), since airbrakes are normally operated on channel 3 in gliders. This includes STk-THR reading STk-ARB.
Glider Setup Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 66.
GLID1FLP/GLID2FLP BASIC MENU
MODEL SUBMENU:
•
MODEL SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 25.
•
MODEL COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 26.
•
MODEL NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 27.
PARAMETER SUBMENU:
•
MODEL RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 28.
•
MODEL TYPE: Specific to GLID models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 68.
•
MODUL (Modulation, PPM or PCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 30.
•
ATL [C
HANNEL
3 T
RIM
L
EVER
(T
HROTTLE
/A
IRBRAKE
T
RIM
) function] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See
ACRO, p. 31.
•
AIL-2 (Twin ailerons with a 5 channel receiver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 30.
REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 31.
END POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 32.
D/R,EXP (Dual/Triple rates and Exponential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 35.
TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 38.
AUX-CH [Auxiliary Channel assignment (incl, ch9 servo reverse)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 39.
TRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 40.
TRIM SUBMENU:
•
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 41.
•
STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 41.
SUB-TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 42.
SERVO DISPLAY AND CYCLE SUBMENU:
•
Servo display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 42.
•
TEST (Servo cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 42.
F/S [FAILSAFE (loss of clean signal and low receiver battery) SUBMENU (PCM mode only):
•
F/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 43.
•
Battery FailSafe ( F/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 43.
GLID1FLP/GLID2FLP ADVANCE MENU
Basics on wing types and tail types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See
ACRO, p. 45.
•
FLAPERON (GLID1FLP only) (aileron servos as ailerons and flaps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 45.
•
FLAP TRIM (camber) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .see ACRO, p. 46.
•
AIL-DIFF (Aileron Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 47.
•
ELEVON (Flying wings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 48.
•
V-TAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 50.
•
AILEVATOR: not available in GLID model types.
Mixes:
•
PROG.MIX1-5 (Linear Programmable Mixes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 59.
•
PROG.MIX6-7 (Curved Programmable Mixes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 62.
•
ELEV-FLAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .See ACRO, p. 54.
•
BUTTERFLY (modified version of AIRBRAKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 69.
•
FLAP-AILE (GLID2FLP only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 70.
•
AILE-FLAP (GLID2FLP only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 70.
•
START OFS (Launch/Start setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 71.
•
SPEED OFS (Minimum drag setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 71.
65
GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC 4-CHANNEL (Aileron/Flap/Rudder/Elevator) GLIDER
This guideline is intended to help you get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start on using your new radio, and to give you some ideas and direction in how to do even more with this powerful system than you may have already considered. It follows our basic format of all programming pages: a big picture overview of what we
’ re trying to accomplish; a
“ by name
” description of the steps to help acquaint you with the radio; and a step-by-step instruction to leave out the mystery and challenge of setting up your model.
For additional details on utilizing each function, see that function
’ s section in this manual – the page numbers are indicated in the first column as a convenience to you.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Prepare your aircraft.
Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your model. (Ex: GLID1FLP.) See p. 68.
[NOTE: This is one of several functions that requires confirmation to make a change. Only critical changes such as a
MODEL RESET require additional
keystrokes to accept the change.]
NAME the model.
P. 25.
(Note that you do not need to do anything to
REVERSE servos as needed for proper control operation.
P. 31.
“
save
”
or store this data.)
STEPS: INPUTS:
Install all servos, switches, receiver per your model
’ s instructions.
Turn on transmitter then receiver; adjust all linkages so surfaces are nearly centered.
Mechanically adjust all linkages to get as close as possible to proper control throws and minimize binding prior to radio set up.
Check servo direction and throws.
Make notes now of what you will need to change during programming.
In the BASIC menu, open the Turn on the transmitter.
PARAMETER submenu.
for 1 second.
(
If ADVANCE, again.) then to highlight
PARAMETER.
Go to MODEL TYPE.
Select proper MODEL TYPE. Ex:
GLID1FLP.
Confirm the change.
to choose PARAMETER.
to MODEL TYPE.
to
GLID(1FLP).
for 1 second.
Close the PARAMETER submenu.
In the BASIC menu, open the MODEL submenu.
Sure? Displays.
to confirm. t o return to
BASIC menu.
as needed to highlight MODEL.
to choose MODEL.
Go to
MODEL NAME.
Input aircraft
’ s name.
highlighted.)
(1 st character of model
’ s name is to change first character.
When proper character is displayed, to move to next character and repeat.
to return to BASIC menu.
Close the
MODEL submenu when done.
In the
BASIC menu, open (servo)
REVERSE.
Choose desired servo and reverse its direction of travel. (Ex: reverse rudder servo.)
4 steps to
REVERSE.
to choose
REVERSE.
to CH4: RUDD.
so REV is highlighted.
Repeat as needed.
66
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Adjust travels as needed to match model
’ s recommended throws (usually listed as high rates).
P. 32.
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential
(
D/R,EXP)
P. 35.
(Note that in the middle of the left side of the screen is the name of the channel and the S
WITCH
position you are adjusting. Two or even three rates may be set per channel by simply choosing the desired S
WITCH
and programming percentages with the S
WITCH
in each of
its 2/3 positions.)
STEPS:
In the BASIC menu, choose END POINT.
INPUTS:
2 steps to END POINT.
Adjust the servos’ end points.
(Ex: flap servo) to choose END POINT.
VR(A)
to
FLAP.
until travel as desired.
Close the function.
Choose D/R,EXP.
Choose the desired control, and set the first (Ex: high) rate throws and exponential.
VR(A). Repeat as needed.
to
D/R,EXP.
to choose
D/R,EXP.
to CH>.
to choose CH>2 (elevator).
A to up position.
[Note screen reads ELEV (UP)] to D/R.
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
. to
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
. to
Set the second (low) rate throws and exponential.
Optional: change dual rate S
WITCH
assignment. Ex: elevator to S
WITCH
G with 3 positions.
(Normally the same for both directions.)
to EXP.
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
. to
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
. to to D/R. A to down position.
Repeat above to set low rate.
to
SW. to center position.
G to
Repeat steps above to set 3rd rate.
Move flap control from the VR(A) dial to the left slider [VR(D)] . (AUX-CH) p. 39.
Where next?
In the
BASIC menu, open AUX-CH.
Choose CH6 (flap).
Change primary control to VR(D).
Change other channels as needed.
to
AUX-CH. to AUX-CH.
to CH6.
to VR(D).
Repeat as required.
Return to the home screen.
(Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.)
TRAINER p. 40.
Multiple wing or tail servos. See wing types and tail types: p. 44, 48.
START and SPEED OFFSETS, BUTTERFLY (AIRBRAKE/crow), and other programmable mixes p. 53.
Retractable Gear, Smoke systems, kill switches, and other auxiliary channel setups: p. 39.
Adjusting SUB-TRIMs to match servo centers: p. 41.
67
A LOOK AT THE RADIO
’
S G the ACRO setups are referred directly to those pages.
MODEL TYPE: This function of the PARAMETER submenu is used to select the type of model programming to be used.
GLIDER TYPES:
CH2
CH2
CH6
CH7
CH6
CH7
CH4
CH1
CH6
CH4
CH1
CH5
Glider1 FLP Configuration Glider2 FLP Configuration
Before doing anything else to set up a glider or sailplane, first you must decide which MODEL TYPE best fits your aircraft.
•
ACRO: for some aerobatic/slope gliders, ACRO is a better choice because of functions it offers that the GLID types do not.
•
ACRO provides:
•
SNAP-ROLL,
•
•
AILEVATOR (twin elevator servo support),
•
AIRBRAKE (a more assignable version of BUTTERFLY).
•
For nitro-powered sailplanes: IDLE-DOWN, THR-CUT, THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing and THROTTLE DELAY programming.
But
ACRO lacks programming for full-span ailerons and START and SPEED OFFSETS.
•
GLID1FLP: The GLID1FLP MODEL TYPE is intended for sailplanes with one or two aileron servos (or none), and a single flap servo (or two connected with a y-connector). This TYPE is meant to be a very simplistic version to set up a basic glider without a lot of added features. Full-span ailerons are not possible in this MODEL TYPE.
•
GLID2FLP: The GLID2FLP MODEL TYPE supports dual flap servos that can also act as ailerons, creating full-span ailerons and flaps.
NOTE: This is one of the several functions that the radio requires confirmation to make a change.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Change model 1’s
MODEL TYPE to
GLID1FLP.
NOTE: This is one of the several functions that the radio requires confirmation to make a change.
STEPS:
Confirm you are currently using the proper model memory. (Ex: 1)
INPUTS:
On home screen, check model name and number on top left.
If it is not the correct model (Ex: 1), use MODEL SELECT, p. 25.
Open
PARAMETER submenu.
for 1 second.
(If Advance menu again.) to 2nd page of menu.
1 step to PARAMETER.
Where next?
Change the
MODEL TYPE.
Confirm the change.
to
TYPE.
to
GLID1FLP for one second.
sure? Confirmation displays.
to confirm.
Close.
Remember: Now that you changed MODEL TYPE, the model memory is almost completely reset. Only the modulation remains intact.
NAME the model: p. 25.
Change the receiver modulation from FM ( PPM) to PCM or vice versa: see p. 28.
Utilize servo REVERSE: see p. 31.
Adjust servo travel with END POINT: see p. 32.
Set up dual/triple rates and exponential (
D/R,EXP): see p. 35.
68
GLIDER ADVANCE MENU
Varied wing types and tail types (twin aileron servos, twin elevator servos, elevon, v-tail, etc). See p. 44-50 for basic information.
•
FLAPERON (GLID1FLP only): 2 aileron servos operate in opposite directions as ailerons and same direction as flaps. See p. 45.
•
FLAP TRIM: provides camber movement or trimming of flaperons as flaps. See p. 46.
•
For sailplanes, this function is also used as wing camber. The amount depends on the model, but usually a small amount (less than 10%) is preferred, since too much camber produces excess drag. Don
’ t use more than about 1/16” travel up or down for glider camber. Some airfoils, such as the RG-15, should be flown with NO reflex/camber. Be sure to consult your model
’ s manual for guidelines.
•
Note that even though you may make
FLAP-TRIM active while using AIL-DIFF, it will not have any effect. The
ONLY function that allows control of the ailerons as flaps in the
AIL-DIFF configuration is airbrake.)
•
Aileron Differential ( AIL-DIFF): allows twin aileron servos to provide differential down travel from up travel. See p. 47.
•
Using a 5-channel receiver with
FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF. See AIL-2, p. 47.
•
ELEVON: for flying wings. See p. 48.
•
V-TAIL: for models with 2 servos operating together to create roll and pitch control. See p. 50.
•
AILEVATOR: not available in GLID model types.
Mixes:
•
Linear Programmable mixes (
PROG.MIX1-5): fully assignable programmable mixes with a linear response. see p. 59.
•
Curved Programmable mixes ( PROG.MIX6-7): fully assignable programmable mixes with a curved response. See p. 62.
•
ELEV-FLAP: pre-programmed mix creates elevator movement from the inboard flaps as well as elevators. See p. 54.
•
BUTTERFLY: Often called crow, BUTTERFLY is the glider version of AIRBRAKE. (BUTTERFLY does not have the option to activate it solely from a switch, and its activation switch is not assignable.
BUTTERFLY may only be turned on/off by S
WITCH
A, and always provides progressively more
BUTTERFLY as the C
HANNEL
3 (T
HROTTLE
) S
TICK
is lowered, or raised if used THR-REV, p. 31.) See AIRBRAKE, p. 55.
Full Span Mixing: Flap-to-Aileron and Aileron-to-Flap
•
FLAP-AILE (GLID2FLP only): This pre-programmed mix is used to create full span flap action on a glider with 4 wing servos.
This changes the camber over the entire wing, which produces less drag than just dropping the flaps by themselves. Since
FLAP-AILE and AILE-FLAP are generally utilized together, one example is shown below setting up both. NOTE: When you have
ELEV-FLAP mixing also, the trailing edge droops with the elevators, increasing pitch response.
Adjustability:
•
RATE range of -100 to +100. Negative setting would result in up flaperon with down flap and vice versa.
•
OFFSET range of –30 to +30. Setting offset position sets the flap position at which the flaperons are neutral. Intended for models that do not have the flaps positioned neutral at the flap servo’s center. (ie. down travel only)
•
SWITCH A-H fully assignable.
•
POSITION fully assignable, including NULL (mix always on) and Up&Cntr and Cntr&Dn to activate the mix in 2 separate positions of the same S
WITCH
. (This allows easy setup of one S
WITCH
position which is no FLAP-AILE or AILE-FLAP mixing, one with both FLAP-AILE and AILE-FLAP mixing, and one with just FLAP-AILE mixing.)
69
•
AILE-FLAP (GLID2FLP only): This pre-programmed mix is used to create full span aileron action on a glider with 4 wing servos. This increases the roll rate and decreases induced drag. For normal flying, a value of about 50% is often used. For slope racing or F3B models in speed runs, you may wish to use a larger value approaching 100%.
Adjustability:
•
RATE range of -100 to +100. Negative setting would result in opposite aileron action from flaps.
•
SWITCH A-H fully assignable.
•
POSITION fully assignable, including NULL (mix always on) and Up&Cntr and Cntr&Dn to activate the mix in 2 separate positions of the same S
WITCH
. (This allows easy setup of one S
WITCH
position which is no FLAP-AILE or AILE-FLAP mixing, one with both FLAP-AILE and AILE-FLAP mixing, and one with just FLAP-AILE mixing.)
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Turn on FLAP-AILE mixing. Set RATE to
48%, which is the portion of the total aileron travel that matches the maximum flap travel.
STEPS:
Open FLAP-AILE mixing function.
Ex: Set up S
WITCH
C as follows:
UP = no full span mixing.
CTR = flap-ail and ail-flap
DWN = flap-ail mixing only.
Assign to S
Turn on
WITCH
C center and down.
AILE-FLAP mixing. Set rate to
100% for maximum possible flap travel with ailerons.
Assign to S
WITCH
C center.
Activate the function.
Set the rate. (Ex: 48%)
Optional: adjust the flap position at which the flaperons are zeroed.
Assign the S
WITCH
and position.
(Ex: C Cntr&Dn)
Close the function.
Open AILE-FLAP submenu.
Activate the function.
Set the rate. (Ex:
100% each way)
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If BASIC menu , again.) to 2nd page of menu.
to
FLAP-AILE. to ON. to +48%.
or VR(A) as needed.
for 1 second to set.
to SW.
to C. to
Cntr&Dn.
to AILE-FLAP. to ON.
A
ILERON
S
TICK
. to
A
ILERON
S
TICK
.
to +100%.
Where next?
Assign the S
WITCH
and position.
to
SW. to to CENTER.
Close.
ELEV-FLAP mixing. See p. 54.
BUTTERFLY. See p. 55.
Use a mix to OFFSET the flaps a set distance on a specified switch: see p. 59.
View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html
70
•
Launch (Start) Offset ( START OFS): The Start function is used to offset the aileron, elevator, and flap servos to the position that provides maximum lift during launch. Normally the ailerons and flaps are drooped about 20-30, with the flaps drooped slightly more to prevent tip-stalling on tow. The elevator can also be offset in order to trim out any pitch changes caused by the flap and aileron presets.
Adjustability:
•
This function is only activated by flipping S
WITCH
G to the back position. If you wish to have this threeposition switch above the left-hand stick (position E), you should purchase a 9CH transmitter.
•
Separate adjustments for each aileron and flap servo (two flap settings for GLID2FLP) and for elevator.
•
RANGE for each adjustment is –100 to +100.
•
Optional assignable dial ( VR) to adjust all 4 wing servos in unison, 1% at a time, across all 4 servos in flight.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Set up a START OFS to gain maximum possible lift on launch.
Each Aileron: 50%.
Each Flap: 100%.
Elevator: -5% to compensate.
STEPS:
Open START OFS function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If BASIC menu , again.) to 2nd page. to
START OFS.
Note: switch is not assignable. Must be
S
WITCH
(9CA=G, 9CH=E.)
Where next?
Activate the function.
Flip switch G toward you.
Set the rates. (Ex:
AIL1 and 2, 50%,
FLAP1 and 2, 100%, ELEV –5%.) to to
OFF. to
AIL1..
+50%. to to +50%. to
Repeat for
ELEV, FLP1 and 2, AIL2.
Optional: set a knob to adjust travel of all 4 wing servos in flight.
Close the function.
to desired knob.
SPEED OFS mixing. See p. 72.
BUTTERFLY. See p. 55.
Create a programmable mix to meet your model’s setups: see p. 59.
View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
71
•
SPEED OFS: The Speed function is used to offset the aileron, elevator, and flap servos for minimum drag in cruise and high-speed flight. Normally the ailerons and flaps are raised about 3-5°. (Some airfoils, notably the RG-15, have higher drag with reflex, so this function should not be used.)
Adjustability:
•
This function is only activated by flipping S
WITCH
G to the forward position. If you wish to have the threeposition S
WITCH
above the left-hand stick (position E), you should purchase a 9CH transmitter.
•
Separate adjustments for each aileron and flap servo (two flap settings for
GLID2FLP) and for elevator.
•
Range for each adjustment is –100 to +100.
•
Optional assignable dial to adjust all 4 wing servos in unison, 1% at a time across all 4 servos in flight.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Set up a SPEED OFS to gain maximum possible lift on launch.
STEPS:
Open SPEED OFS function.
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If BASIC menu , again.) to 2nd page. to
SPEED OFS.
Each Aileron: 5%.
Each Flap: 3%.
Elevator: -1% to compensate.
Note: switch and position are not assignable. Must be the upper 3position S
WITCH
(G on 9CA, E on 9CH.)
Where next?
Activate the function.
Flip switch G away from you.
Set the rates. (Ex:
AIL1 and 2, 5%,
FLAP1 and 2, 3%, ELEV –1%.) to to
OFF. to
AIL1..
+5%. to to +5%. to
Repeat for
ELEV, FLP1 and 2, AIL2.
Optional: set up a dial to adjust travel of all 4 wing servos in flight.
Close the function.
to desired knob.
START OFS mixing. See p. 71.
BUTTERFLY. See p. 55.
Create a programmable mix to meet your model’s setups: see p. 59.
View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.
72
헬리콥터 모델의 기능들
거의 모든 BASIC menu 기능들은 비행기(ACRO setup), 글라이더(GLID1FLP/2FLP setups), 헬리콥터(HELISWH1/SWH2/SWH4/
SR-3/SN-3 setup)에 대해 설정법이 동일하다. 이러한 기능들은 뒤로 가서 ACRO 장을 참고하십시요.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 74.
HELI (SWH1/2/4, SN-3, SR-3) BASIC MENU
MODEL SUBMENU:
•
MODEL SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .ACRO 부분을보세요,p.25.
•
MODEL COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . ..ACRO 부분을 보세요,p.26.
•
MODEL NAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요,p.27.
PARAMETER SUBMENU:
•
MODEL RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .ACRO 부분을 보세요,p.28.
•
MODEL TYPE: , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., p.77.
•
MODUL ( . . . . 무선변조방식-PPM 또는 PCM ). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요,p.30.
•
ATL [C
HANNEL
3 T
RIM
L
EVER
(T
HROTTLE
/A
IRBRAKE
T
RIM
) 기 능] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요,p.31.
REVERSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요,p.31.
END POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 32.
NORMAL 조건을 쎄팅하자. (TH-CV/NOR, PI-CV/NOR, REVO./NOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 81.
THR-CUT(헬리콥터모델을 위한 특별한 기능). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 82.
D/R,EXP (헬리콥터모델을 위한 특별한 기능) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 35.
TIMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 38.
AUX-CH [보조 Channel 지정(ch9 써보 reverse기능 포함)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 39.
TRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 40.
TRIM SUBMENU:
•
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 41.
•
STEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 41.
SUB-TRIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요,p. 42.
SERVO DISPLAY AND CYCLE SUBMENU:
•
Servo display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, P. 42.
•
TEST (Servo cycle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 42.
F/S [FAILSAFE (시그널을 잃어버리거나 수신기 Battery의 저하) SUBMENU (PCM 모드에서만):
•
F/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 43.
•
Battery FailSafe ( F/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 43.
HELI (SWH1/2/4, SN-3, SR-3) ADVANCE MENU
THROTTLE HOLD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 83.
THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, 와 REVO. MIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 84.
IDLE-UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 85.
TRIMS/OFFSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 86.
DELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 87.
HOVERING SETUPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 88.
GYROS and GOVERNORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .p. 89.
Mixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 53.
•
PROG.MIX1-2 (Linear Programmable mixes, default to AIL-RUD, ELEV-PIT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 59.
•
PROG.MIX6 (Curved Programmable mix, default AIL-ELEV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 60.
•
THROTTLE-NEEDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 부분을 보세요, p. 56.
73
기본적인 헬리콥터로 설정 시작하기
이 지침은 기본적인 헬기(SWH1)의 쎄팅을 도와주고, 조종기 사용을 숙지시키고, 새로운 조종기를 빨리 사용할 수 있게하고,
이 성능좋은 시스템으로 당신이 이미 고려하는 것보다 더 좋은 아이디어와 방법을 제공해주기 위함이다.
이 후의 모든 프로그래밍 페이지들은 기본적인 형식-우리가 이루고자하는 무엇에대한 개괄적인 큰 그림;
조종기를 숙지하는데 도움이되는 하나의 "이름"으로 대표되는 단계; 그런다음 당신의 모델을 쎄팅하는데
도움을 주는 단계별 구체적인 사용 설명-을 취한다.
간단히, 전형적인 헬리콥터를 제어하는 방법은 다음과 같다.
•
에일러론(Aileron): cyclic lateral (roll)을 변화시킨다. 헬리콥터 몸체를 옆으로 기울인다.swashplate를 좌/우측으로 기울인다. CH1.
•
엘리베이터(Elevator): cyclic pitch를 바꾼다. 헬리콥터의 머리를 위/아래로 바꾼다. swashplate 전체를 앞/뒤로 기울인다.
CH2
.
•
러더(Rudder): 테일로터(tail rotor)의 각 을 변경시킨다. 헬리콥터의 요축(Yaw)을 좌/우로 움직인다. CH4.
•
컬렉티브피치(Collective Pitch): 메인로터컬렉티브(main rotor collective)[패들의 각도]를 조정한다, 메인브레이드의 피치를 변경시킨다.
증가된 켈렉티브피치(쓰로틀과 함께..)는 헬리콥터를 상승하게 한다. 이것은 쓰로틀스틱상의 쓰로틀과의 조합으로써 움직인다. CH6.
•
쓰로틀(Throttle): 캬브레터를 열고닫는다. 이것은 쓰로틀스틱상의 컬렉티브피치 와의 조합으로써 움직인다. CH3.
•
레보(REVO): 피치의 증/가감으로 인해 러더를 증/가감 시키는 믹싱이다. 이것은 엔진토크의 증가로 인한 헬리콥터의 돌아감(회전)에
대한 보상을 돕는다. (Heading-hold/AVCS 자이로 기능을 쓸때 절대로 레보믹싱을 사용치 마라! 자이로가 이미 이것을 하고 있다)
추가적인 상세사항은 이 매뉴얼 내 이에대한 기능편을 보라. ? 그 페이지번호는 첫장에 나와 있다.
GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:
당신의 헬리콥터를 준비하라.
모델 설명서에 따라서 모든써보,스위치,수신기등을 설치한다. 조종기의 모든 트림(Trim),
다이얼(Dial),슬라이더(Slider)를 중립에 놓는다.
모든 컨트롤 링키지는 적절한 구조를 갖기위해 그리고 차동이 존재하지 않게하기 위해
써보혼부터 볼링크까지 90도(또는 설명서에 준한 수치)가 되도록한다.
모든 링키지들는 조종기 쎄팅전에, 적절한 제어를 가능케하기위해 가능한 가깝게
기계적으로 조정을 하고 구부림을 최소화 해야한다.
당신 모델을위해 적절한 MODEL TYPE을 선
택하시요.
예: HELI (SWH1). p. 77를 보세요.
[NOTE : 이것은 변경을 적용하기 위해
조종기가 확인을 요구하는 여러기능
BASIC menu내에서,
PARAMETER submenu를 연다.
중의 하나이다. 치명적인 변경사항만이
그 변경이 적용되기위해서 추가적인
키입력이 필요하다.
.]
(만일 이미 원하는 model type이 표시됬다면,
원치않는 쎄팅을 방지키위해서 model reset 을 수행한다.
)
MODEL TYPE 으로이동.
적절한 MODEL TYPE 을 선택.
예 :
HELI(SWH1).
설정변경 확인 후 PARAMETER를 닫는다.
BASIC menu내의 MODEL submenu를
열어라.
조종기를 켠다.
1초동안,
( )
라면
를 다시
후 PARAMETER를 Highlight
로써 PARAMETER 를 선택.
로써 TYPE 으로 이동
로써
HELI(SWH1). 1초동안.
sure?가표시됨. . 로써 확인.
로써 BASIC Menu 로 돌아감.
MODEL
Highlight하기위해 필요한만큼
로써 MODEL을 선택.
그후,MODEL NAME을 넣어라. p.25.
(이 데이타를 저장하기위해 "저장"에 대해
어떤 것도 알 필요가 없다.)
MODEL NAME 으로 이동.
모델이름을 입력하시요.
완료후 MODEL submenu를 닫으세요.
(모델이름의 첫번째 글자가
하이라이트 된다.)
로써 첫번째 글자를 변경한다.
적당한 글자가 표시될때,
로써 다음글자로 이동한다. 반복하라.
로써 BASIC menu로 돌아간다.
74
적절한 control동작을 위해 필요시 서보를
리버스하라.
예: L
EFT
R
UDDER
S
TICK
results in leading edge of tail rotor blades moving left. Reverse to operate properly. P. 31.
BASIC menu내에서, REVERSE를 열어라..
원하는 써보를 선택하고 그 써보의
동작방향을 리버스한다.
(예: 러더 써보 리버스)
모델의 권고된 동작범위를 맞추기위해서
필요시 Travel들을 조정하라.(보통
큰비율값으로 조정된다.)
P. 32.
THR-CUT을 활성화 시켜라.P. 82.
REVERSE 까지 4번 움직인다.
로써 REVERSE 선택.
로써 CH4: RUDD.
로써 REV 가 하이라이트 된다.
필요시 위를 반복해라.
END POINT 까지 2번 움직인다.
BASIC
menu내에서, END POINT를 선택.
써보의 end point들을 조정
(예: flap servo)
로써 END POINT를 선택.
로써
ELEV.
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
.
로써 원하는 만큼 Travel을 줄인다.
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
.
로써 원하는 만큼 Travel을 줄인다.
BASIC menu로 돌아가라.
THR-CUT 기능을 열어라.
그기능을 활성화시켜라. 활성화 시키기
위해 원하는 SWITCH와 Position을 선택하라.
필요시 위를 반복해라.
를 4번
.
로써 SW.
로 써
C. 로써 DOWN.
THROTTLE STICK 을 아이들 위치에
1
놓은 상태에서, 엔진히 확실히 꺼질때까지
Rate를 조정하되 쓰로틀 링키지는 휘지않게.
C를 down위치로.
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
.
로써
RATE. 닫힐때까지.
NORMAL조건 Throttle curve를 설정한다 .
2
(보통, 첫비행 전에 설정을 변경 할 필요
는 없다
.) P. 81.
닫는다.
THR-CV/NOR 기능을 열어라.
필요시 조정하라. 닫아라.
로써
THR-CV/NOR.
5%. 로써 다음point. 반복.
NORMAL조건에서 상공비행을위해
Blade의 피치가 하위-4도,중간+5도,상위
+8~+10도가 되도록 collective pitch curve를
설정한다.
2
(만약 초보자라면 상급자에게
지도바랍니다.)
P. 81.
PIT-CV/NOR기능을 열어라.
원하는 curve에 맞추기위해 point들을
조절하라 .. ( 예: 첫 point: 8%.)
이기능을 닫아라.
NORMAL조건 Revo.믹싱을 설정.(Heading
-hold gyro경우, revo를 사용치 않는다.) P. 81.
REVO./NOR 기능을 연다.원하는 시작 point로 조정한다.
(예:
10%.)
로 PIT-CV/NOR.
8%로. 로써 다음point.반복.
로
REVO./NOR.
10%로. 로 다음point. 반복.
기능을 닫는다.
Gyro방향을 확인한다. (Note: heading-hold
/AVCS gyro를 사용한다면, 적절한 설정을
위한 GYRO programming을 사용하라.
p. 89을 보라.)
조종기를켜고, 헬리콥터의 꼬리를 손으로 오른쪽으로 움직였을때,
자이로는 러더에게 어떤 입력(움직임)을 주어야한다.
(테일로터Blade의 앞단이 좌측으로
움직여야 한다.)
만일 Gyro가 반대방향의 입력을주면, Gyro상에 달려있는 리버스기능을 바꾼다.
75
HOVERING PITCH 와 HOVERING THROTTLE의
사용법을 배우자.
p. 88를 보라.
쓰로틀스틱이 중간에 놓인상태에서,
VR(C) dial은 피치와는 독립적으로 쓰로틀을
조정한다. VR(A) dial은 쓰로틀과는 독립적
으로 피치를 조정한다.
1초동안누름
.
(만일
ADVANCE, 다시.)
1 step으로써
SERVO. throttle스틱을 중간에r
VR(C) VR(A) center dials.
비행전 체크를 위해 모델 설명서를 따라서 Blade 트레킹, 등을 확인한다. 결코 Blade들이 밸러스Checking없이 적절하게
밸런스가 맞았다고 가정하지 말라.
수신기배터리의 전압을 체크하라! 엔진시동전에 항상 배터리체커로 전압을 체크하라! (비행을 위해서 밤새 충전
되었을 것이라고 결코 가정 하지마라.) 부족한 충전, 써보링키지의 휨,그리고 다른 문제들은 자신 또는
다른사람들과 재산에 해를 가하는 위험한 추락으로 이어질 수 있다.
Swashplate가 0 travel에서 수평이 되는지 확인하라. 필요하다면 암(Arm)들을 조정하라
Full Collective Pitch를 적용시 Swashplate가 다른것들-링키지등-에의해 간섭을 받지 않도록 체크하라. Full cyclic pitch와 roll도
같은 방식으로 체크한다. 만약 그렇지 않고, 필요하다면 END POINT내에서 이를 조절하라. p.32
중요알림: 쓰로틀홀드, 아이들업, 오프셋등의 쎄팅에 앞서 우선 NORMAL조건하에서 확실하게 동작해야 한다는 것을 명심해야 한다.
비행전에 설정체크하기: 전압을 확인하라! 그런다음, 보조자와 함께, 주위를 완벽히 체크하고, 등등, 헬리콥터가 뜰랑말랑
할때 까지 쓰로틀을 천천히 올린다. roll, pitch, 또는 yaw의 움직이는 경향을 잘 보고 필요시 트림(Trim)을 조절한다.
만일 꼬리가 떨리면, 자이로게인(Gyro gain)이 너무 높은 것이므로, 게인을 낮춘다.
Where next?(Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.)
THROTTLE HOLD: P. 83.
SUB-TRIM p. 41,
조건에 따라 트림을 독립적으로 분리하는 것
(
OFFSETS): p. 86.
거버너 설정( Governor setup): p. 89.
IDLE-UP p. 85.
DELAYS :아이들업들 사이의 전환시 써보의 반응속도를 줄이기위함: p. 87.
Rudder-에서-throttle로, 그리고 다른 프로그램가능한 믹스들 p. 59.
1
Periodically move the throttle stick to full and back down to ensure proper servo settings.
2
It is critical that dials A and C be centered when the pitch and throttle curves are setup.
76
헬기에한정된
BASIC MENU 기능들
MODEL TYPE: PARAMETER submenu의 이기능은 사용될 모델프로그래밍의 Type을 선택하는데 사용된다.
모델에대한 어떤것을 설정하게 전에, 첫번째로 당신의 비행기에 가장 잘 맞는 MODEL TYPE을 결정해야만 한다.
만일 조종기가 9CA라면 디폴트는 ACRO이고, 9CH이면 디폴트는 HELI(SWH1)이다.
헬리콥터 스워시플레이트(SWASHPLATE)의 종류들:
9C 조종기는 5가지 -"Single Servo"방식(SW1-대부분의 헬리콥터에서 사용하는 방식)과 CCPM의 4가지형태
(cyclic and collective pitch mixing)를 포함해서- swashplate설정을 지원한다. "Single Servo" Swashplate방식은 각 축(Axis)당
1개의 써보를 사용한다: aileron, elevator (cyclic pitch), 그리고 collective pitch. CCPM방식 헬리콥터들은 3 축(Axis)의 움직임을
만들기위해 써보들의 조합을 사용한다. 아래에 보여진 것처럼, 4가지의 CCPM 종류가 있다. CCPM은 몇가지의 이점을 가지고 있는데,
그중에서 가장 큰 이점은 Swashplate를 움직이기위해 기계적으로 훨씬 덜 복잡하다는 것이다.추가적으로, 몇개 써보의
조합으로 동작하기때문에(예: SR3은 elevator움직임을 얻기위해 3개의 써보가 모두 같이 사용된다) 정확도와 중립성
뿐만아니라 기능한 토크가 극적으로 향상된다.
어떤 헬리콥터는 Swashplate가 180도로 분리되어 있다는 것을 제외하고는 SR-3나 SN-3 형태를 가진다는 것을 주목하기 바란다. 예를
들면, Kyosho Caliber™는 SR-3 형태이지만 앞쪽이아닌, 뒷쪽으로 2개의 평행한 써보를 가진다. 만일 당신의 Swashplate가
180도로 분리되어 있다면, 당신은 여전히 이 Swashplate Type을 사용 할 수 있을 것이다. 그러나 당신은 재대로된 동작을 할때까지
필요시 SWASH AFR(p.79)기능으로 이를 조절 해야 한다. 추가적으로, CCPM의 다른 각도들도 "지정가능Programmable mix"들을
이용해서 만들어 내는 것도 가능하다. (www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html 이곳에 있는 FAQ에서 특정한 예들을 살펴보라!)
당신이 의도하는 것과 다르게 동작합니까?
많은 CCPM설치시 특정기능(SWASH AFR)의 방향을 리버스하거나 또는 단일 써보의 방향을
리버스(REVERSE) 하는 것이 필요하다. 자세한 것은 SWASH AFR을 살펴보라!(p.79)
Swashplate Type 쎗팅 절차
HELISWH1 Type: AAileron, Pitch 그리고 Elevator 써보들이 독립적으로 Swashplate에
연결되어 있다. 대부분의 헬리콥터키트들이 HELISWH1 type이다.
HELI SWH2 Type: 그림처럼 푸시로드들이 위치한다. Elevator는 기계적 링키지로써 동작한다.
Aileron 입력시, aileron과 pitch써보는 Swashplate를 좌우로 기울인다.
Pitch 입력시, aileron과 pitch써보는 Swashplate를 위아래로 올린다.
Pitch Aileron
Front
HELI SWH4 Type: 그림처럼 푸시로드들이 위치한다. Aileron 입력시, aileron과 pitch써보는
Swashplate를 좌우로 기울인다. Elevator 입력시,Elevator 써보들은 Swashplate를
앞뒤로 기울인다. Pitch 입력시, 4개의 모든써보들이 Swashplate를 위아래로 올린다.
Aileron
(Pitch)
Elevator 1
Front
Pitch
(Aileron)
Elevator 2
(CH8)
HELI SR-3 Type: 그림처럼 푸시로드들이 위치한다. Aileron 입력시, aileron과 pitch써보는
Swashplate를 좌우로 기울인다. Elevator 입력시, 3개의 모든 써보들이 Swashplate를
앞뒤로 기울인다. Pitch 입력시, 3개의 모든 써보들이 Swashplate를 위아래로 올린다.
Pitch
(Aileron)
120
120
120
Front
Aileron
(Pitch)
Elevator
HELI SN-3 Type: 그림처럼 푸시로드들이 위치한다. Aileron 입력시, 3개의 써보들이
Swashplate를 좌우로 기울인다. Elevator 입력시, elevator와 pitch 써보가 Swashplate를 앞뒤로
기울인다. Pitch 입력시, 3개의 모든 써보들이 Swashplate를 위아래로 올린다.
77
Aileron
120
120
Elevator
Front
120
Pitch
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
model #3의 MODEL TYPE을 비행기에서 collective pitch와 aileron기능이
2써보들의 조합으로 작동하고 120도를가진
CCPM Type([HELI(SR-3)])으로 변경하라!
STEPS:
당신이 현재 적절한 모델메모리를
사용중인지 확인하라(예:3)
INPUTS:
시작화면의 좌측상단의 model name과
# 을 체크한다.
만일 적절한 model이 아니라면(예: 3),
MODEL SELECT (p.25)를 살펴보라.
PARAMETER submenu를 연다.
1초동안누름,
(만일 ADVANCE, 다시누름.)
다음에 할것은 어디에?
원하는 Model Type으로 변경한다.
(예, SR3.)
변경을 적용한다.
로써 menu의 2번째 Page로
1번으로써
PARAMETER.
(예: 2 steps.)
1초 동안 누름.
“sure?”표시됨. 로적용.
1
닫는다.
단일써보가 적절한 동작을 하지 않는다면,
REVERSE: 를보라. p. 31.
만일 제어가 거꾸로 동작한다면(예.Elevator),SWASH AFR( p. 79.)를 살펴보라.
만약 확실치 않으면 SWASH AFR을 보라.
1
조종기가 반복된 "비프"음을 내보내고 화면상에 model memory가 Copy될때까지의 과정이 보여진다.
만일 이 과정이 완료되기 전에 Power를 끄면,그 데이타는 Copy되지 않는다.
78
SWASH AFR [HELI(SWH2/4/SN-3, SR-3) 인 경우만]:
Swashplate function rate settings (SWASH AFR)은 aileron, elevator (SWH2는 제외) 과 collective pitch 기능의 Rate(Travel)을 줄이거나/늘리거나/리버스 한다. 해당기능을
수행하는데 포함되는 모든 써보들의 움직임을 조절하는것 또는 리버스하는 것은,
단지 그 기능을 사용 할 때 뿐이다. 이러한 type들은 해당제어를 발생시키기 위해 여러개의써보들이
함께 사용되어지기 때문에, 간단하게 써보하나의 REVERSE나 END POINT를 조절함으로써 어떤 제어Travel
을 정확히 수행하지 못한다. SW1은 각 제어기능에 하나의 써보를 사용하기 때문에 SW1에서 AFR은 필요가 없다.
이것은 보기에는 쉬워도 설명하기는 매우 어렵다. 그래서, 예로써 Kyosho Caliber의 swashplate 를 쎗팅해보자.
메이커의 권고대로 설치를 모두하고, 모델을 HELI(SR-3)로 설정하라. 이제 swashplate 쎗팅을 적절하게 조절해 보자.
Aileron는 항상 2개의 써보만을 사용하기 때문에, 이 것을 첫번째로 점검한다. 두개가 적절하게 동작하고(설정변경이 필요없다),
두개가 거꾸로 동작하고(전체기능을 리버스 한다.), 또는 하나의 써보가 거꾸로 동작하던지(그 써보만 혼자 리버스시킨다.) 한다.
다음은 Elevator를 점검한다. 기억하라! Aileron관련 써보들이 정확히 동작한다는 것을, 그래서 만일 Elevator가 재대로 동작하지 않는다면, 우리는
단지 남은 2가지의 경우만을 선택 할 수 있다. 모든 기능이 리버스가 필요하든지, 또는 써보(들)은 리버스될 필요가 있는 Aileron과 역할분담을 하지 말아야한다..
마지막은 collective(Pitch)이다. 만일 aileron과 elevator가 재대로 동작하면,잘못될만한 유일한 것은 모든방향에서 collective가 잘못되는
것이다.(모든 기능을 리버스하라.) 우리의 예제에서, SR-3는 Caliber의 swashplate가 180로 나누어진 것 이다.
그러므로,아마도 몆가지 기능이 잘 동작하지 않을 것이다. collective pitch동작은 거꾸로이다;그러나 3개의 모든 써보를
리버스시키는 것은 또한 aileron과 elevator동작을 리버스 시키게 될 것이다. 그러나, collective pitch rate를 +50%에서
-50%로 변경시키는 것은 aileron동작에 영향을 주지 않으면서 collective pitch를 리버스 시킬 것이다.
79
SR-3 Swash Type
A
ILERON
S
TICK
.
SR-3 SWASHPLATE상에서 알맞는 움직임을 검사하기
알맞는 움직임 잘못된 움직임 교 정 방 법
E
LEVATOR
S
TICK
.
R
UDDER
S
TICK
.
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
.
Swashplate가 오른쪽으로 기운다.
Swashplate가 왼쪽으로 기운다.
Swashplate의 뒤쪽이 위로 움직인다.
Swashplate의 뒤쪽이 아래로 움직
Swashplate의 앞쪽이 아래로 움직
인다; Swashplate의 뒤쪽이 위로
움직인다.
인다.
Swashplate가 반대로 움직인다.
Swashplate 전체가 위로 움직인다.
The leading edges of tail
blades
가 왼쪽으로 회전한다.
Blade들이 오른쪽으로 회전한다.
전체 Swashplate가 위로 끌어올려진다.
Swashplate가 아래로 내려간다.
SWASH 내의 AIL쎗팅을 리버스
하기위해 -50%로설정
Ch6 servo 가 옳지않게 움직인다.
; REVERSE.
Ch1 servo가 옳지않게 움직인다.
;
REVERSE.
SWASH 내의 ELE쎗팅을 리버스
(예: +50 에서
-50
으로)
Ch2 servo 가 옳지않게 움직인다.
;
REVERSE.
REVERSE the rudder servo.
SWASH 내의 PIT쎗팅을 리버스
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
SR-3 MODEL TYPE 상에서 collective pitch의
Travel을 +50%에서 -23%로 조정하고, 3개의
모든 써보의 Travel을 리버스시키고, collective pitch의 Travel만 감소시킨다.
다음에 할것은 어디에?
STEPS:
SWASH AFR 기능을 연다.
PIT travel 을 -23으로 조정한다.
INPUTS:
1초동안누름
.
(만일 ADVANCE면, 다시누름.)
로
SWASH AFR.
로
-23%로 설정 menu를 닫음.
Swashplate
가 0 travel
에서 수평이 되는지 확인하라. 필요하다면 암(Arm)들을 조정하라.
최대 collective 피치를주고, 계속 수평인지를 점검하라! 만약 그렇지 않다면, 이를
수정하기위해 필요하다면 servo의 travel들을 조정하라. END POINT: see p. 32.
NORMAL 조건에 대해서 쎗팅한다.
: ( TH-CV/NOR, PI-CV/NOR, REVO./NOR): see p. 81.
D/R,EXP을 설정한다.: see p. 35.
80
NORMAL 비행조건 쎗팅하기
NORMAL 비행조건은 대표적으로 호버링( Hovering )에 사용된다. Throttle과 Collective pitch curve는 Blade의 Collective Pitch가 증/가감 됨에도 불구하고 지속적인 엔진 RPM을 제공하기위해 조정된다.
이것은 과도한 부하시 "내려앉음"(자동차운전시 가파른언덕을 오르면서 5단기어로 가속을 시도하는 것과 같은 현상) 현상 이나,
엔진손상을 무릅쓰고 낮은부하상에서 과도한RPM( like flooring the throttle while in neutral)발생시키는 것들로부터 엔진을 좋게
유지시킨다. 이 2개의 Curve 와 Revo.믹싱은 서로 관련이 있기때문에, 여기서는 이 3가지를 먼저 설명하고, 다음에 설정예를 다룬다.
NORMAL Throttle/Pitch/Revo Curve들은 간단하게 모두 BASIC Menu내에 있다는 것을 명심하라. 이것은 또한 나중에 다른
4가지조건[idle-up 1 (IDL1), idle-up 2 (IDL2) and idle-up 3 (IDL3), throttle hold (HOLD)]과 같이 ADVANCE Menu내에서 업데이트
되서 나타난다. Normal조건상의 Throttle/Pitch Curve는 항상 활성화 되있다는 것을 명심하라. 그들의 기능을 정지시킬 수는 없다.
다른 4개의 조건들은 throttle curves 또는 throttle hold을 통해 활성화 된다. Idle-Up은 p.85를 보라. Throttle Hold는 p.83을 보라.
•
TH-CV/NOR: 는 보통 THROTTLE STICK움직임에 Linear한 반응을 보이지 않는 Normal(NORM) throttle curve를 입력한다.
이 Curve의 Point 3을 조정함으로써 THROTTLE STICK움직임의 중간부분-호버링위치-에서의 엔진의 RPM을 조정한다.
다음에, 다른 4개의 point들은 원하는 Idle과 엔진최대속도,그리고 이 point들간의 부두러운 곡선변화 들을 만들기위해
조정된다. Throttle Curve에대해 더 많은 것을 알고자하면 p.85를 보라.
•
PI-CV/NOR: 는 normal (NORM) collective pitch curve,호버링부근 비행을위한 collective pitch curve를 입력한다.
normal collective pitch curve-보통,Blade각도가 -4(Low),+5(Neutral),+8~+10(High)*-는 어떤 일정한 엔진속도에서
최고의 수직상승 퍼포먼스를 제공하기위한 throttle curve와 조화시키기위해 조정된다. 당신은 THROTTLE
STICK 움직임과 연계된 가장 좋은 collective pitch 각도를 위해서 5 Point의 Curve를 프로그램할 수 있다.
Collective pitch curve에 대한 자세한 내용은 p.85를 보라.
•
REVO./NOR:
는 메일로터의 Collective pitch각도의 변화에 따른 토크발생을 상쇄시키기위해-쓰로틀 증가시 Yaw축의 움직임
으로부터 헬기를 유지시키기위해서-Collective pitch 명령을 Rudder에게로(PITCH-RUDDER;(역자주:PITCH발생시 RUDDER도
영향을줌)) 믹스한다.REVO.는 heading-hold/AVCS gyro를 사용하지 않는 헬기에서 "꼬리잡기"에 매우 유용하다.
NOTE: 믹스가능한 Revo.는 3가지가 있다:normal (NORM), idle-up 1 / 2 (IDL1/2), idle-up 3 (IDL3).
3가지모두 ADVANCE menu내에서 조절가능하다. 반드시 Heading-hold/AVCS gyro과 Revo. 믹싱을 조합해서 사용치 마라!
"시계방향회전로터" 와 "반시계방향회전로터" 를 위한 디폴트 point를 포함해서 Revo.에대한 자세한 것은 p.85를 보라.
*
이 디폴트 권고값은 직진비행을 한다고 가정한것이다. 만일 당신이 초보자라면 지도자의 조언을 따르라. 어떤 지도자는 연습시 Low부분을 +1로
사용하는 경우가 있다. 이경우에는 지도가가 위급상황에서 throttle/collective stick을 가장아래로 끌어내린다 할지라도헬리콥터는
매우 느리게 강하 할 것이다.
81
GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:
Normal 비행조건에서 다음을 설정하라
Throttle/Collective Pitch Curves
와
R e v o .
THR-CV/NOR 기능을 열어라.
첫번째 point를 조정하라 . (예:
5%.)
1초동안누름
로
.
(만일 ADVANCE, 라면 다시누름.)
THR-CV/NOR.
Base point:
지상에서 엔진이 신뢰할만큼 아이들링을
할때까지 throttle curve의 Base Point(역자주:
Stick Low,첫번째Point)를 조정하라. Blade의피치가
-4도가 되도록 collective pitch curve의 Base Point
PIT-CV/NOR 기능을 열어라.
첫번째 point를 조정하라.
(예: 8%.)
5%
로
8%
로설정 .
PIT-CV/NOR.
로설정.
(역자주:피치Stick Low,첫번째Point)조정하라.
헬기의 스키드가 뜰랑말랑 할 때 까지 throttle 을
올려라. 헬기의 머리가 전혀 회전하지 않을 때까지
REVO./NOR 기능을 열어라.
첫번째 point를 조정하라.
(예: 4%.)
Revo.의 base point(역자주:첫번째Point)를
조절해라.
Hover point:
collective pitch curve를 +5도가
THR-CV/NOR를 조정하라.
되도록 조정하라. 헬기를 호버링하기 쉽게 하라!
PIT-CV/NOR를 조정하라.
착륙시키고 엔진을 끈다. throttle curve과 rudder trim을 조정한다. throttle의 중간부분에서
REVO./NOR를 조정하라.
헬기가 자연스럽게 호버링 될때까지 위 과정을
로
4%
REVO./NOR.
로설정.
필요시 위를 반복하라.
필요시 위를 반복하라.
필요시 위를 반복하라.
반복하라. throttle ¼ stick부터 ½ stick까지 재빠르게
올려라. throttle 인가시 헬기의 머리가 회전하지
않을때까지 Revo. point 2와3을 조정하라.
High point:Blade
피치가+8도~+10도가
되도록 Collective pitch curve를조정한다.
호버링하다가 재빠르게 throttle up한다.
엔진이 가라앉으면, throttle curve를 올린다.
엔진이 너무 빨리 회전하면, point 4또는5에서
Collective pitch curve를 올린다. 호버링중에
THR-CV/NOR를 조정하라.
PIT-CV/NOR를 조정하라.
REVO./NOR를 조정하라.
최대 throttle을 넣어라. 그런다음 호버링을
위해 내린다. 머리위치가 변하지 않을 때까지
REVO.
를 조정하라.
다음에 할것은 어디에?
필요시 위를 반복하라.
필요시 위를 반복하라.
필요시 위를 반복하라.
GYRO 기능:p. 89를 보라.
필요시
HOV-THR와HOV-PIT를 조정하라 : p. 88을 보라.
Throttle Hold설정하기: p. 83을 보라.
idle-ups 1, 2 , 3설정하기: Throttle/ collective pitch curve, revo.믹싱
(
TH-CURVE, PI-CURVE, REVO. MIX): p. 85를 보라.
GOVERNOR 기 능: p. 89를 보라.
D/R,EXP: p. 35를 보라.
THROTTLE CUT
: THR-CUT기능은 비행후 엔진을 끄기위해 사용된다. 엔진은, 엔진을 끄기위해 트림을 움직인다음 비행전에
트림을 원위치해야하는 번거로움을 없애주는 어떠한 one-touch스위치를 통해서도 끌 수 있다. 헬리콥터모델의
THR-CUT 기능은 ON/OFF throttle 위치(보통 아이들보다 약간 위)를 포함한다. THR-CUT기능은 설정point아래에
THROTTLE
STICK이 위치해야지만 throttle cut동작을 한다. 이는 갑작스러운 엔진 가속을 피하기 위해서 이다.
Throttle cut에대한 자세한 예는 p.34의 ACRO편을 보라.
Throttle cut은 단지 NORMAL모드에서만 동작되고, Idle-up모드에서는 동작하지 않는다.
http://www.futabarc.com/faq/faq-9c-q506.html
Note:
THR 에 커서를 옮겨놓은 상태에서 trigger point를 설정하는 단계로 들어간다.
그런다음 원하는 위치에 THROTTLE STICK을 놓고 다이알(Dial)을 1초동안 누르고 있어야한다.
이 기능은 단지 이 스틱위치보다 위에서 Trigger되기위해 리버스될 수 없다는 것을 명심하라.
82
헬리콥터-고유의
ADVANCE MENU 기능들.
THR-HOLD: 이기능은 SWITCH E(9CH)나 G(9CA)를 움직이면 엔진과 THROTTLE STICK과의 연계가 해제되고 엔진은
아이들링 위치를 유지한다. 이기능은 보통 Auto-rotation을 연습하는데 사용된다.
THR-HOLD 를 설정하기전에,throttle linkage를 때어내서 high throttle일때 carburetor가
최대한 열리도록 링키지길이를 조정한다. 그런다음, digital trim을 이용해서 엔진의
아이들 위치를 조정한다. THR-HOLD에서 아이들로 유지시키기위해 THROTTLE STICK을
아이들 위치로 옮기고, 그런다음 hold SWITCH를 on/off로 반복적으로 움직여서
써보가 움직이지 않을때까지 Offset값을 변경한다. 엔진의 아이들 속도를 더 낮추거나,
엔진이 꺼지기를 원한다면더큰 마이너스(-)숫자를 입력하라.
조절가능성:
•
아이들링위치: 원하는 엔진 RPM을 얻기위해서 쓰로틀의 아이들위치를 기준(0%)으로 -50%~+50%범위를 가진다.
•
Rudder offset:
테일로터 pitch의 변위값이다. 이값은 Throttle hold시 기체가 회전하는 것을 막아준다.
•
Time delay:
Rudder offset time delay 은 러더를 쉽게다룰 수 있게하고 꼬리가 흔들리는것을 방지하기 위해서 설정한다.
DELAY 기능(p.87을보라)내에서 설정가능 하다.
•
Switch
지정: SWITCH G
•
Throttle curve:
쓰로틀은 미리지정된 하나의 위치로 이동하기때문에 THR-HOLD을 위한 Curve는 필요없다.
•
Collective pitch curve:
독립적인 Curve로써, THR-HOLD기능과 같이 자동으로 활성화되고,일반적으로
Blade의 Pitch가 -4°~(+10°~ +12°)가 되도록 설정한다.
•
Revo. mix:
Revo. mix는 엔진으로부터의 토크를 조절하기위한 것이기때문에, THR-HOLD에서는 Revo. mix가 가능하지 않다.
•
우선순위: Throttle hold기능은 Idle-Up보다 우선순위가 먼저다. 엔진 Start를 할때 Throttle hold 와 Idle-up
SWITCH들 이 원하는위치에 있는지 확인하라. (엔진시동시 안전상의 이유로 Throttle hold인 상태로 있기를 추천한다.)
•
Gyro:
자이로 프로그래밍은 THR-HOLD를 포함하는,각 비행조건들에 대해서 각각 따로된 자이로 쎗팅을 하기위한 옵션을 가진다.
이것은 THR-HOLD 비행으로 들어갈때, 비행조건이 달라짐으로써 자이로쎄팅이 변하게 되어, 잘못된 러더오프셋과 헬기가
Pirouet(빙글빙글도는것) 되어지는 결과를 만들어, 사용자의 잠재적인 실수를 유발시키는 것을 피하기 위함이다.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Throttle hold를 설정하라.
STEPS: INPUTS:
1초동안누름.(만일 basic, 면 다시누름.)
로써 THR-HOLD.
THR-HOLD 를 On해서 엔진이 아이들링
되는 원하는 쓰로틀 위치를 결정하라.
그리고, 원하는 실행지점에 도달하기위해
요구되는 Percentage를 조정하라.
이 기능을 활성화 시킨다.
원하는 엔진의 쓰로틀 위치를 설정한다.
Optional: rudder offset을 설정한다.
(느려진반응을 원하면 DELAY부분으로 가라.)
닫아라.
다음에 할것은 어디에?
로써OFF.
로써 원하는percent. ´입력
로써 OFF . 로원하는 Offset입력.
THR-HOLD 를 위한PIT-CURVE: p. 85를 보세요.
THR-HOLD 를위한 DELAY (collective pitch반응을 수월하게 하기위해.): p. 87를 보라.
GYRO 설정: p. 89를 보라.
Idle-Up설정하기: Idle-up을 위한 Throttle/Collective pitch Curve 와 Revo. Mixing
(TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIXING): p. 85를 보라.
D/R,EXP:
p. 35를 보라.
83
THR-CURVE 와PIT-CURVE: 이런 5-point Curve들은 지속적인 엔진부하를 위해 엔진 RPM과 Blade의 collective pitch사이의
관계를 가장 잘 Match시키는데 사용된다. Curve들은 normal, idle-up 1, idle-up 2, idle-up 3비행조건에 따라서 따로 따로
조정가능하다. 추가적으로,throttle hold조건에서 collective pitch curve가 따로 조정가능하다. 적절한 Setup Type
(예:Normal비행조건, p.81)에 따라서 Sample Curve들이 표시된다.
디폴트값 제시:
•
Normal:
Collective pitch curve point1/3/5에서 피치각도가 각각 -4/+5/(+8~+10)*도가 되도록 커브값을 조절한다.
Throttle curve은 point1/2/3/4/5에서 0,30,50,70,100%로 한다.
•
Idle-ups 1 & 2:
Idel-up 1과2는 자이로쎄팅- Heading-hold/AVCS 쎄팅과 Normal Mode 자이로쎗팅-을
제외하고는 일반적으로 동일하다.
pitch curve는 위의 normal curve와 유사할 것이다.
•
Idle-up 3:
Collective pitch curve point1/3/5에서 피치각도가 각각 (-8~-10)/0/(+8~+10)도가 되도록 커브값을 조절한다. Throttle curve는 100,75,50,75,100로 설정해서 뒤집어서 연기하는 Maneuver들(배면호버링등)을 위해 Full Throttle을 제공토록 한다.
•
Throttle Hold pitch curve:
Normal pitch curve값에 준해서 쎄팅하다가(inverted auto일경우는 idle-up 3 pitch curve 쎄팅값에
준해서 시작), 가능하다면 랜딩시 충분한 피치를 확보키위해, 마지막 point에서 피치가 대략 1~2°가 증가하도록 조정한다.
*
(이 디폴트 권고값은 직진비행을 한다고 가정한것이다. 만일 당신이 초보자라면 지도자의 조언을 따르라. 어떤 지도자는 연습시 Low부분을 +1로
사용하는 경우가 있다. 이경우에는 지도가가 위급상황에서 throttle/collective stick을가장아래로 끌어내린다 할지라도헬리콥터는
매우 느리게 강하 할 것이다.
)
조절가능성:
•
Normal조건의 Curve들은 편의상 BASIC menu내에서 수정가능하다.
•
모든 curve들은 ADVANCED
•
해당 비행조건(Flight Condition) 선택시 자동으로 해당 커브가 선택된다.
•
Idle-up curve들은 비행시(배면비행포함) collective pitch가 감소하더라도 엔진 RPM을 일정하게
유지하기위해 프로그램되어진다.
•
편집하고자하는 Condition의 curve로 바꾸고자 한다면 , cursor를 point 1위에 올려 놓고 해당Condition의 이름으로 되어있는 curve로 변경하라.
•
명괘하게 하기위해, 현재 활성화된 Condition의 이름(조종기상의 Condition Switch에의해서 활성화된..)이 현재
편집되고 있는 Curve의 Condion의 이름 뒤에서 괄호(< >)안에 보여진다.(예:아래의 Curve Display를 보라.)
아래의 그림에서 현재는 normal condition이 활성화 되어있으나, idle-up 1 condition의 curve가 수정 중이다.
•
Idle-up들 과throttle hold pitch curve은 심지어 이 condition들이 활성화 되기 전 일지라도 아마 편집 될 것이다.
이 Condion들의 throttle curve를 활성하시키는 것은 이들의 condition을 활성화시키는 것이다.
REVO. MIX: 이 5-point curve mix는, 속도와 Blade의 collective pitch가 변할때 토크가 변하는 것을 상쇄시키기위해
반대방향으로 러더의 입력을 추가하는 것이다.
조절가능성이 있는 것들:
•
3개의 개별 Curve가 가능하다:호버링을 위한 Normal;Idle-up 1과 2가 합쳐진 조건;Idle-up3.
•
Normal condition curve들은 편의상 BASIC menu에서 편집가능하다.
•
모든 Curve들은 ADVANCED menu내에서 조정 되어진다(가능한다).
•
각 Condition에따라 그에맞는 mix가 비행시 자동으로 선택되어지고, 그 Condition에대해 throttle설정
(예:THROTTLE HOLD또는 THR-CURVE)이 프로그래밍시 활성화 되어 있다면 자동으로 활성화 된다.
•
편집하고자하는 Condition의 curve로 바꾸고자 한다면 , cursor를 POINT1 위에 올려 해당 Condition Curve를 선택하세요.
명괘하게 하기위해, 현재 활성화된 Condition의 이름(조종기상의 Condition Switch에의해서 활성화된..)이 현재 편집되고
있는 Curve의 Condion의 이름 뒤에서 괄호(< >)안에 보여진다.
84
•
Revo. mixing rate는 5-point curve이다. "우회전로터"일때 러더는 collective pitch가 증가할때 시계방향(우회전)으로 Mix되고,
"좌회전로터"인경우는 반대가 된다.동작방향을 바꾸는 것은 Curve Rate숫자의 (+)를(-)로 부호를 바꾸거나 그반대로 한다.
디폴트값 제시:
•
"우회전 로터": low throttle 부터 high 까지 -20, -10, 0, +10, +20%
•
"좌회전 로터": low throttle 부터 high 까지 +20, +10, 0, -10, -20%
•
자신의 헬기를 동작시키면서 가장 좋은 실제값으로 조정하라.
•
Idle-up들을 위한 Revo. Curve들은 배면비행 동안 마이너스피치와 증가된 Throttle에 대응하기위해 종종 V자 모양의 적절한
Rudder입력을 제공한다. (Rudder는 토크가 증가될때마다 반대방향으로의 응답이 필요하다. 배면비행시, throttle stick의 중간부분에서 아래쪽으로는 Throttle이 증가되고, 마이너스피치가 된다. 그러므로 토크가 증가하게되고,
만일 revo. mix를 적절하게 증가시키지 않는다면 헬기콥터는 빙글빙글 돌아버릴 것이다.)
IDLE-UPS: 헬리콥터들에 한정된 추가적인 비행 Condition들이 가능하다. 이러한 비행 Condition들은 어떤 Maneuver들을
보다 쉽게 연기하기위해서 서로다른 throttle curve,collective pitch curve, revo. mixing, 과 trim들(IDLE-3은제외)을 가진다.
마지막으로, Gyro와 Dual Rate기능은 아마도 선택된 Condition-각각의 idle-up을 위한 Gyro와 Dual Rate기능을 포함해서-에 대해
분리된 Rate들을 제공하기위해 설정될 것이다.
가장 평범한 비행condition들 중의 하나는 쉽게 정상자세 부터 배면과 후면 에 이르기까지 쉽게 자세를 변경 할 수 있다.
이렇게하기 위해서는 stick의 중간에서 Pitch는 0으로 설정하고, 중간이상은 + Pitch(정상자세에서 떠오른다), 중간아래는 - pitch
(배면일때 떠오른다.)로 설정한다. throttle curve는 Pitch가 변화하는 동안에도 엔진이 지속적으로 동작할 수 있도록 조정한다.
추가적으로 Idle-Up들은 헬리콥터의 어떠한 비행종류(예:고속 직진/후진 움직임)에 대한 비행성능 또는 maneuver들
(loops, rolls, stall turns), 심지어는 같은 maneuver이지만 heading-hold/AVCS gyro mode에서 normal gyro mode로바꾸는
비행들의 비행성능을 최대로 높이기위해서 사용된다. 9C조종기는 사용자에게 "normal 비행 condition" 과 추가로
3가지의 설정을 지원하기위한 3개의 Idle-Up을 지원한다.(IDL3는 governor 셋팅을 포함하지 않는다는 것을 명심하라.)
조절가능성:
•
SWITCH G (9CA) 나 E (9CH)는 normal (NORM), idle-up 1 (IDL1), and idle-up 2 (IDL2) curve을 위해서 이미 프로그램되어 있다.
이switch/position 지정은 조정할 수 없다.
•
그 condition을 위해 활성화된 throttle curve는 THR-CURVE내에 있다.
•
Curve들은 심지어 collective pitch가 마이너스(-)가 될 지라도 지속적인 RPM을 유지하기위해서 조정된다.
•
REVO. mixing은 idle-ups 1과2를 위한 1번째 Curve와 idle-up3만을 위한 두번째 Curve를 가진다는 것을 명심하라.
•
Gyro 쎗팅은 각각의 Idle-Up에 대해 따로따로 설정한다.(p.89를 보라).
•
Governor 쎗팅은 Normal/Idle1/Idle2순으로 설정한다. 그러나 Gyro처럼 5 point별로 각각 조정할수 있지는 않다.
(p.89를 보라.)
•
OFFSET을 활성화시키는 것은 idle-up condition별로 각각 독립되게 트림을 조절할 수 있는 TRIM LEVER 를 만든는 것이다.
Throttle/pitch curve 와 revo의 예는 p. 81의 "Normal 비행 Condition 설정"을 보세요.
85
OFFSET:
옵션으로써 normal condition에대한 트림과는 별도의 분리된 트림들을 추가적으로 가진다.이 기능은 헬리콥터의 트림을
자동으로 변경시키는데 사용한다. 예를들어서, 호버링에서 고속 비행으로 전환시. "우회전로터" 헬리콥터는 고속일때
우측으로 흐르는(drift)는 경향이 있다. 그래서 aileron offset 은 헬리콥터를 좌측으로 기울게 끔 Offset(보상/상쇄)을
적용할 것이다. 필요한 elevator offset는 헬리콥터의 치수에 따라 변한다. 그래서 고속일때 collective pitch가 변화하는 것을 지켜
보고서 이 Offset을 결정해야만 한다. Rudder offset은 Offset기능이 동작하는 동안 revo. mixing과 trim lever움직임 둘다에게 영향을 미친다.
조절가능성:
•
Switch 할당을 완료하라, 추가로 각 idle-up들을 위한 개개의 트림을 만들고,그 트림들사이를 switch시키는 CONDITION option을 설정한다.
•
OFFSET이 활성화될때(이에대한 switch가 On), Normal condition에서의 트림이 아닌 TRIM LEVERS 들을 움직임으로써
저장된 offset을 조정한다.
•
OFFSET이 활성화되었을때(이에대한 switch가 Off), OFFSET 과 어떠한 트림 조정들도 효과가 없다. (헬기는 현재 활성화된
비행 Condition의 트림쎗팅을 따른다.)
•
디폴트는 ON이다.
•
OFFSET기능이 금지되면(inhibited), 트림조정은 어떤 비행 Condition내에 있을지라도 모든 비행 Condition들에 영향을 미친다.
•
큰 Offset값으로 인해 급하게 트림값이 변경되는 것을 DELAY기능을 이용해서 느리게 할 수 있다.
NOTE: 명심하라. Offset과 Revo. mix기능은 Heading-hold/AVCS gyro를 사용할 때는 추천하지 않는다. 왜냐하면 이것들은
AVCS가 제공하는, 트림과 토크에 대한 자동교정 기능과 충돌하기 때문이다.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
3개의 Idel-up condition들에대한 각자의
개별 트림들을 설정하라.
idle-up 2 rudder trim을 고속시 토크를
교정하기 위해 조정하라.
다음에 할것은 어디에?
STEPS:
OFFSET기능을 연다.
switch setting 을
COND로 변경한다.
IDL2를 선택한다.
필요시 trim setting을조정한다.(예: rudder 를 +8%로.)
INPUTS:
1초동안누름
.
(만약 basic,면 다시누름.)
로써
OFFSET.
로써 COND.
로써
IDL2.
로써
+8%로 설정.
menu를 닫고 normal과 idle-up2사이의
트림의 차이를 확인하라.
E (9CH) 나 G (9CA)
NORMAL 에서 IDL2로 변경. 변경된rudder trim을 검사해라.
DELAY: p. 87을 보라.
THR-HOLD: p. 83을 보라.
Idle-Ups설정하기: Throttle/Collective pitch Curve 와Revo. Mixing
(idle-up을 위한 TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIXING: : p. 85를 보라.
86
DELAY: Delay기능은 OFFSET, REVO. MIXING, THROTTLE HOLD 기능들이 On/Off될때마다 트림위치들간의
매끄러운 변화를 제공한다.
조절가능성이 있는 것들:
•
분리된 delay time들은 swashplate type에 따라서 aileron (SW1), elevator (SW1), rudder에 대해 가능하다.
•
50% delay쎗팅으로써 써보는 새로운 트림위치로 옮겨지는데 아주 긴 시간인 약 0.5초가 걸린다.
•
일반적으로,약10~15%의 Delay이면 충분하다.
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
하나의 flight condition에서 다른 조건으로
전이하기 쉽게하기위해 모든 3 채널상에 delay를
설정한다. 고로 "hard jump"는 일어나지 않는다.
STEPS:
DELAY 기능을 연다.
필요시
AIL 응답을 조정한다. (예: aileron을 +8%로 설정.)
INPUTS:
1초동안누름
.
(만일 basic,이면 다시누름.)
로써 DELAY.
로써 +8%로 설정.
다음에 할것은 어디에?
다른채널들을 반복한다.
로써
ELE. 위단계를 반복하세요.
menu를 닫고 전이가 느려진것을 확인하라.
E (9CH) 나G (9CA)
NORMAL에서 IDL2로.servo들이 점진적으로
새위치로 움직이는지 확인하라.
THR-HOLD: p. 83을 보라.
Idle-Up설정하기: Throttle/Collective pitch Curve와Revo. Mixing
(idle-up을 위한 TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIXING : p. 85를 보라.
87
HOVERING 상태조정 ( HOV-THR 와 HOV-PIT):
Hovering throttle 과 hovering pitch는 throttle/collective pitch curve에 대해서 오로지 Normal condition과 중간(Hovering위치)
부근의 성능에만 영향을 미치도록 개별적으로 미세조정하는 것이다. 이것은 비행중에 이상적인 Curve를 설정할
수 있게한다.
조절가능성:
•
온도,습도,고도 또는 다른 비행조건의 변화로 인한 로터속도의 변화를 쉽게 다룰 수 있다.
•
원치않으면 둘의 조정은 금지될 수 있다.
•
둘의조정은 또한 NULL로 설정 될 수 있다. 임시로 knob을 Off시키지만 마지막으로 기억된 쎄팅값은 유지 될 것이다.
•
조정값은 기억되어지고, 그런다음 knob은 다른 많은 조정에 사용되기위해 다시 중앙위치로 돌아오게된다.
여러모델의 trimming knob을 쉽게 사용 할 수 있다.(중앙으로부터 knob offset만큼 기억이 박볻 되어질때,
트림값은 누적된다는 것을 기억해라.)
•
조정은 트림이 0%로 읽힐때가지 Dial을 돌림으로써,기억되고, 재빠르게 초기값으로 reset된다. 그런다음 자신의 중앙위치로
Knob은 돌아온다.
•
위의 것들을 포함하는 모든기능들은 모델이 Stick중앙에서 호버링한다고 가정한다. 이를 명심하라.
•
오로지 Normal Condition내에서만 가능하다.
GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS:
호버링중에 호버링의 미세조절을 하라.
HOV-THR기능을 열라.
1초동안누름
.
(만일 basic,라면
다시누름
)
이것은 오로지 호버링(Normal)조건
에서만 영향을 준다는 것을 명심하라.
로써 HOV-THR.
Optional: 각hovering curve를 조정하기
위해 Knob을 움직여라. NULL은 마지막
헬기의 호버링이 좋을때까지 throttle과 collective pitch curve를 조절하라. 비행시,
저장된 위치에서 curve를 잠근다.
원하는
knob을 지정함.
HOV-THR 과 HOV-PIT Knob을 이용해서
개별적으로 hover point근처에서 collective pitch 와 throttle curve를
다른 모델을 선택하기전에 현재
Dial쎗팅을 저장하라.
저장하기위해 1초동안 누름.
or VR(C)
를 중앙에 위치시킨다
.
조정하라.
닫아라.
HOV-PIT 기능을 열어라.
로
HOV-PIT.
비행후 새로운 쎄팅값을 저장하라.
다음에 할것은 어디에?
다른 모델을 선택하기전에 현재
Dial쎗팅을 저장하라.
저장하기위해 1초동안 누름. or VR(A)
를 중앙에 위치시킨다.
닫아라.
THR-HOLD: p. 83을 보라.
Idle-Ups설정하기: Throttle과 Collective pitch Curve그리고Revo. Mixing
(idle-ups 을 위한 TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIXING : p. 85를 보라.
D/R,EXP: p. 35를 보라.
88
GYROS 와 GOVERNORS:
쎗팅만으로는 할 수없는 어떤 복잡한 일을 하기위해 전자장치를 이용해서 비행하자.
Gyro란 무엇인가?
gyroscope는 움지임을 감지하고 교정하는 전자장치이다. 예를들어, 바람이 불어 헬리콥터의 꼬리가
좌측으로 돌아간다면, Gyro는 이 움직임을 감지할 것이고( 그리고 아무런 입력이 주어지지않았다는 것을 확인하고), 이를 교정할 것이다.
헬리콥터 설정에 이것이 어떤 도움울 주까? 성능좋은 Gyro는 Revo.믹싱이 전혀 필요없다. Gyro는 움직임을 감지해서 원하지
않는 움직임을 교정한다.그래서 올바르게 동작하는 복잡한 Curve를 얻기위해 시간을 낭비할 필요가 없다.
Gyro sensor종류들: Gyro의 종류는 매우많다. 초창기의 Gyro들은 어린애들의 gyroscope 장난감과 유사한
회전식 Drum으로된 기계식 Gyro이었다. 다음세대는 piezoelectric(압전)이라고 불리는,움직임이 감지되면 전자적 Pulse를
내보내는, 특수형태의 Crystal을 응용했다. 지금 이글을 쓸 당시 최고성능의 Gyro는 SMM기술울 사용한다. 이것은
Silicon Micro Machine의 약어로 Computer Chip들이 움직임을 감지한다. SMM은 지극히 정확하고 온도변화 등으로 인한
부정확성에 덜영향을 받는다.
Gyro반응에따른 형태들:
•
Normal:
는 움직임을 감지하고 움직임을 둔화시킨다.(만일 Gyro가 2초동안 코스를이탈해서 회전하면, Gyro는 2초동안 이를 교정한다.)
•
Heading-hold/AVCS:
는 회전한 각도(time/rate의 변화를 추적함으로써)를 계산하고 똑같은 회전각을 달성할때까지
수정값을 제공한다.
•
Stick priority: a feature on most high-end gyros. The more input given on the channel the gyro controls, the less sensitive the gain is automatically. This way, if you give a large input for a stall turn, for example, the gyro turns itself off and does not fight the stall turn. As you ease off the rudder, the gain increases again, minimizing tail wag and keeping the model straight. (If your gyro does not include stick priority, you can manually create it. Please see www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.)
자신의 숙련도,헬리콥터,그리고 재정을 감안하여 맞는 Gyro를 선택하기:
•
기계식: 아직도 사용된다. Piezo나 SMM에비해서 신뢰성이 떨어지고 쎄팅시 엄청난 노력이 필요하다.
•
Heading-Hold아닌 Piezo방식: 지금은 그리비싸지 않는 Gyro로써 신뢰성이 있고 설정이 간단하다. 어떤것은 Dual
Rate와 비행시 감도를 조절하기위해 remote gain control를 가지고 있다. 정밀 비행을 위한 heading-hold능력이 없다.
•
Heading-Hold Piezo방식: 최근까지는, 최상의 Gyro이었다. 비싸고 설정하기가 복잡하다. GPS처럼 Heading인식이
추가된다. temperature drift(장비의 온도에따라서 쎗팅위치가 달라진다.)와 같은 작은 어려움이 나타난다.
•
Heading-Hold SMM: 21세기의 Gyro기술. Computer chip 기술. 비싸고,설정하기 쉽고,높은 내구성을 갖는다.
온도에대한 민감성이 괄목하게 줄어들었다. 보다빠른 응답을 나타내기위해 전용의 digital servo를 사용할때 많은 frame rate setting을 포함한다. 이에대한 제품들:
•
GY401: 보다 간단한 설정. 초보 비행부터 3D까지 대응하는 이상적인 Gyro
•
GY502: 보다 고급비행에 있어 401보다 더 좋은 중립성(centering). Class III 경기를 위한 이상적인 제품.
•
GY601: 빼어난 중립성. 극한의 빠른 응답시간. 전용 써보가 필요.
GYRO: 는 gyro 감도를 선택하고/조정하는법을 단순화한다. 그리고 2개이상의 gyro gain쎗팅를 할 수 있도록 제공한다.
(gain이 높으면, gyro는 더 많은 교정값은 내보내고, "softer" 하고 덜 흔들리는 헬리콥터로 느끼게한다.)
이 기능은 비행중에 대부분의 gyro들의 gain을 조절할 수 있게끔하는 가장 좋은 방법이다.
조 절 가 능 성 :
•
수신기의 5번 채널에 자이로 감도 설정 채널을 꽇으세요.(변경 불가)
•
STD와AVCS/Heading-hold (GY) 설정type은 AVCS/Heading-hold gyro들을 위해 조정을 간편하게한다.
•
모든 switch할당능력 은 Cond. option을 통해서 선택한다.
•
Cond.
option은 각 condition당 1개의 분리된 gyro설정을 제공하고, 해당 쎗팅값이 condition에 따라서 자동으로 선택된다.
각각의 비행 condition의 특정한 요구에 맞추기 위해서 gain값의 변경이 가능한다.
•
각 Gyro 쎗팅은 -100~+100 gain값으로-ATV쎗팅값 -100%~+100%와 같은 의미로- 설정 할 수 있다.
•
Dual mode gyro들(heading-hold/AVCS 와 normal)은 간단하게 자이로쎄팅값의 부호(sign)을 변화시킴으로써 각 mode를
Trigger할 수 있다. 마이너스(-) 쎗팅은 normal mode로 Trigger한다. 플러스(+) 쎗팅은 AVCS mode로 Trigger한다.
•
퍼센트값이 클수록 gain이 높다는 것을 나타내며, gyro감도가 민감하다는 의미이다.
•
꼬리의 떨림 또는 흔들림 게인값이 너무 높다는 것을 가르킨다. Gyro쎗팅값을 꼬리의 떨림이 없어질때까지 내려라.
89
AVCS/Heading-hold Gyro들을 위한 Gain 예제( GY)
GY
0% 100% NOR 100% AVC
"Normal Mode"
"Heading Hold Mode"
-100% +100% 0%
STD
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
idle-up1/2,3,normal condition에대한 heading-hold/AVCS 쎗팅값으로 heading-hold/AVCS gyro를
설정하라.
STEPS:
GYRO기능을 열고활성화하라.
Optional: gyro type을 Heading-
INPUTS:
1초동안누름 .
(
만일 basic, 라면 다시누름.)
로
GYRO.
Where next?
Optional: switch할당을 바꾸라.
예
:
Cond.를 선택.
필요시 Gyro rate를 조정하라.
(예:
NORM, IDL3에서 –50%를, IDL1과2에서
+50% 를 시작 point로써 설정)
기능을 닫는다.
GOVERNOR: p. 91를 보라.
D/R,EXP: p. 35를 보라.
DELAY: p. 87를 보라.
로써
SW.
로써
Cond.
로써
NORM 50%로 설정.
로써 AVC 50%로설정.필요시반복.
90
GOVERNORS:
Magnetic sensor
GV-1
연결도
Throttle servo
Control amp
Mixture servo
Fuel mixture기능이
사용될때만 연결됨
Throttle channel
Speed setting channel
조종기로부터 Speed를 설정코자
할때 연결됨.
Governor ON/OFF / Mixture trim channel
조종기에서 governor on/off할때, mixture trim이
사용될때, mixture curve data가 조종기로에서 governor로 보내질때 연결된다.
수신기
거버너가 무엇인가?
Governor는 헬리콥터 헤드의 RPM을 읽어내는 센서들과 Blade의 pitch변화,온도조건변화
등에 관계없이 헤드의 속도를 일정하게 유지키위한 쓰로틀 쎗팅을 자동으로 제어하는 제어장치로 구성된다.
Governor는 일정하게 헤드속도를 유지시켜주기때문에 경기용헬리콥터에서 많이 사용된다.
헬리콥터 Setup을 어떻게 도와드릴까요? Governor는 원하는 Head Speed를 유지하도록 엔진의RPM을 자동으로
조절해주기때문에 throttle curve를 설정하는데 드는 많은 시간을 제거해준다.
GOVERNOR: Governor mixing기능은 조종기에서 GV-1 (Governor) speed settings (rS1, rS2, rS3)을 조정 할 수 있게한다.
(만일 다른종류의 governor를 사용한다면, 제조사의 지침을 따르라.)
조절가능성:
•
On/off may be separate from speed switching by plugging governor on/off into ch8 and changing CUT-CH setting.
•
If using separate on/off, switch assignment is totally adjustable. Be careful not to assign governor off to a condition switch if you want the governor to function in that condition.
91
•
Speed switching and governor ON/OFF may be together using one switch or ON/OFF switching may be performed using an independent switch/channel.
•
When speed setting control uses CH7 and separate ON/OFF switch is not used, CH8 can be used for other functions.
•
In-flight adjustment of the head speed (for easy adjustment during tuning) may be created using an additional channel and a programmable mix. See www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html for details.
The GV-1 controls throttle when it is active, so the throttle will not obey any FailSafe settings preset for throttle in the transmitter. Always set the FailSafe setting for the GV-1’s on/off channel to OFF. This way the governor is shut off and the throttle obeys the FailSafe throttle commands.
Expert Tip: Mounting the GV-1 to the counter gear instead of the fan dramatically simplifies installation in many models.
Setting example: When speed and ON/OFF are using one switch:
Governor Speed
RS1: OFF
RS2: 1400
RS3: 1700
Switch Position
(Switch C or G)
Up or NORM
CNTR or IDL1
DOWN or IDL2
Rate (%)
0
50
100
Adjustment from Tx.
Use up to 0%. (Governor speed display reads “off”.)
Speed adjusted by raising and lowering rate.
Speed adjusted by lowering rate.
•
The relationship of the governor speed setting rS1~rS3 and the switch positions conforms to the table above.
•
In throttle hold, always check that the governor is off.
•
If the speed value rises when the cut switch is activated, reverse the “ DIR” setting from +LIMIT to -LIMIT or vice versa.
92
GOAL of EXAMPLE:
Set up a GV1 governor to use both channels into the receiver and switch between the governor settings automatically when changing conditions.
STEPS:
Open and activate the GOVERNOR function.
Consider setting the battery FailSafe settings and other helpful functions on the GV-1 itself.
Optional: change cut-off channel to channel 8 and assign switch and direction for on/off (channel 8).
INPUTS:
for 1 second.
(If basic, again.) to GOVERNOR. to
ACT.
to
CH8.
to
- if opposite switch
direction is desired.
to desired S
WITCH
.
Where next?
Optional: change switch assignment to select governor settings. Ex: select switch that selects the conditions.
Adjust governor speed settings per switch position or condition as needed.
(Ex: defaults are fine.) Allows head speed adjustment from transmitter.
Close the function.
to to
SW.
G. to each S to next S
WITCH
WITCH
position.
position. Repeat.
GYRO: see p. 89.
Adjust FailSafe (
F/S) settings (p. 43).
Adjust idle-up 3 collective pitch curve for same rates of climb upright/inverted.
See p. 85.
Adjust elevator/aileron response to fit your flying style: see D/R,EXP and END
POINT/SWASH AFR: pp. 35, 32, 79.
93
GLOSSARY
3D: Common name for certain types of aerobatic maneuvers. Aircraft: flying below the model’s stall speed, such as torque rolls. Helicopters: combining 2 or more maneuvers, such as rolling loop.
4.8V: 4.8 volt battery pack, made of 4 Ni-Cd 1.2V cells. See Accessories.
5-cell: 6.0 volt battery pack, made of 4 alkaline cells or 5 Ni-Cd cells. See Accessories.
6V (6Volt): battery pack, made of 4 alkaline cells or 5 Ni-Cd cells. See Accessories.
ACCELERATION: a delay mix which richens engine mixture and then returns to normal to compensate for abrupt throttle changes. See THR-NEEDLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Accessories: additional optional items which may be used with your 9C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
ACRO: model type designed for use with powered aircraft. Selected in the MODEL submenu under TYPE . . . . . . . . . . ..29
ACRO vs GLID comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
ACT. Active. Make a feature able to be utilized. Opposite of INH. Only visible in certain features.
Adjustable Function Rate: see
SWASH AFR.
Adjustable Servo Travel (AST): a specific type of end point adjustment. See END POINT.
Adjustable Travel Limited (ATL): End point adjustment for low end only, for throttle channel. See ATL.
Adjustable Travel Volume (ATV): an older, less specific term for end point adjustment. See
END POINT.
ADVANCE menus: Specific menus for each model type which allow the modeler to access and program the radio’s more advanced features.
AFR: Adjustable function rate. Used only in HELI model types with CCPM heads. See SWASH AFR.
AIL-2: second aileron servo assignment. See Twin aileron servos.
AIL1/2/3/4: Designation for the individual servos that are being commanded by the aileron command. Ex: when using ailevators, the two elevator servos are also acting as ailerons 3 and 4 (unless you set their values to 0). See Twin aileron
servos and Twin elevator servos.
Aileron: surface that controls the roll of the model. Also called cyclic roll on a helicopter.
Aileron-to-flap mixing: Mixing used to create full-span aileron action. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable
mix. This is the default setup of one mix in GLID.
Aileron-to-rudder mix: Mixing that automatically creates a “coordinated turn”. Not a preprogrammed mix. See
Programmable mix. This is the default setup of one curve mix in
HELI / GLID.
Aileron Differential: Decreased down aileron travel when compared to up aileron travel. Minimizes “dragging” the low wing and creates more axial rolls. See Twin aileron servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Ailevator: two elevators on separate channels, also capable of acting as additional ailerons. See Twin elevator servos.
AILEVATORS: (ACRO) Twin elevator servos plugged into separate channels, used to control elevator with the option to also act as ailerons in conjunction with the primary ailerons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Airbrake-to-elevator mixing: ( GLID) Applies up or down elevator when airbrakes are deployed, correcting for any pitch change from the added drag. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix.
Airbrake: (
GLID) Leading edge flaps on gliders, controlled by C
HANNEL
3 (N
ORMALLY
T
HROTTLE
) S
TICK
.
AIRBRAKE: (ACRO) Combines elevator, flap, and optionally spoilers to suddenly slow the model for spot landings. May be triggered by T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
P
OSITION
. For similar glider programming, see BUTTERFLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
AMA: Academy of Model Aeronautics. Non-profit organization governing model aircraft flight in the US. . . . . . . . . .5
AST: Adjustable Servo Travel. See
END POINT.
94
ATL: Adjustable Travel Limited. Standard type of trim used for throttle, where the trim is effective only in the idle portion of the
T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
P
OSITION
. Normal trims affect the entire travel of the servo (ex: elevator trims), but ATL trims only the low end of the throttle movement, allowing throttle idle adjustments that don’t over-drive the servo at full throttle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
ATV: Older, less clear terminology for end point adjustment. See
END POINT.
Autorotation: The ability of a helicopter to land safely without engine power, using the stored energy in the blade’s rotation to produce lift for flaring.
AUX-CH: Auxiliary channel setup. Used to assign which
KNOBS
/
SWITCHES
/
SLIDERS
control channels 5-9. Includes CH9 servo reverse. Also allows assignment of a channel to mixing only (assigned as
NULL), with no primary control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Backup battery: battery used to protect data storage in case of removal of master transmitter battery. In most Futaba radios, including the 9C, EEPROM data storage is used, so no backup battery is used or needed.
BACKUP ERROR: transmitter’s hard-coded memory has been lost. Send for service immediately. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Base-Loaded antenna: also called Whip antenna. Aftermarket equipment not approved by Futaba.
Basic model setups: guidelines to setting up the most basic models of each type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACRO 22
GLID 61
HELI 74
BASIC menus: Specific menus with most commonly used features for each model type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .ACRO 25
GLID 68
HELI 74
Battery care and charging. (Charging the Ni-Cd batteries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Battery FailSafe: determines how the receiver indicates an airborne pack low-battery warning. Defaults: 56% throttle, requires throttle to idle to override. To adjust the warning point, set a T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
P
OSITION
in F/S. . . . . . . . . . . . .43
BEEP: tone emitted by transmitter to signify a variety of situations. See Error messages.
Binding: friction in a joint exceeding the movement of the linkage. Sticking or inability to continue movement. The servo continues to attempt to move the surface beyond its power/capabilities, rapidly draining battery power as it continues to struggle.
Brake flap mixing: ( GLID) Three mixes: brake flap- to-elevator, to-aileron and to-speed flaps. 1) compensate for unwanted reaction to lowering the brake flap, 2) increase brake flap area by including the flaperons, and 3) add lift to increase maneuverability. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix.
Buddy Box: see Trainer box.
BUTTERFLY: (GLID) [also called crow, AIRBRAKE (ACRO)]. Activates up flaperons and down flaps for gliding speed control without spoilers or airbrakes. Note: More adjustable programming is available in ACRO, AIRBRAKE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
CAMPac: Optional extended data storage module. Futaba stock # DP16K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
CCPM: Cyclic (pitch and roll) Collective Pitch Mixing. Multiple servos work in unison on the helicopter’s head to create one or more of the control functions. Ex: 3 servos set at 120 degrees operate the entire head. The 2 forward servos work together to rotate both the blade’s pitch and the roll cyclic (aileron) in a SR3 head type. See MODEL TYPE, HELI.
CH5&6: setting in AIL-2 that allows the second aileron servo to be in channel 5. See Twin aileron servos.
CH6 or 7: default setting in AIL-2. Second aileron servo is in channel 6 or 7 depending on function used. See Twin aileron servos.
Channel 9 switch selection and direction control: See AUX-CH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Channel delay: see THROTTLE DELAY (ACRO) and DELAY (HELI).
Charge: to increase the electrical energy, measured as voltage, available in a battery pack. See Battery care and charging.
Condition: ( HELI) separate flight setup that has significant adjustability separate from the basic model setup. See IDLE-
UP 1, 2, 3 and THROTTLE HOLD.
Contact information, North American Service Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
95
Copy model: see MODEL COPY.
Crow: see BUTTERFLY (GLID) and AIRBRAKE (ACRO).
Cursor: See S
ELECT
B
UTTONS
.
Curve Mix: a mix that does not have the same reaction at all points along the master channel. See Programmable mix.
Cyclic: horizontal controls on a helicopter. Cyclic pitch is typically called elevator. Cyclic roll is typically called aileron.
Data reset: erase all data in a specific model. See
RESET.
DELAY: (HELI) slows the servo’s reaction time when changing from one condition to another. Eases any “jumps” in transition from one pitch setting to another, etc. Also see THROTTLE DELAY, p. 57 (ACRO). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
DELAY-ELE: (ACRO) portion of AIRBRAKE that slows the input of the elevator to avoid sudden jumps in pitch. See AIRBRAKE.
Delta peak charger: common name for a specialized charger designed and required to properly peak charge both NiMH and NiCd batteries, actually called a Zero Delta V Peak Charger. See Battery Care and Charging.
Dial: transmitter’s rotary control and button used in various ways during programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Dial mix: mix that uses a knob or slider as the master control, moving the slave servo based upon the movement of the knob or slider. See Prog. mix.
Differential: uneven movement in each direction of a control surface. Usually used when discussing ailerons or when describing an undesirable unevenness in movement of other controls. See Twin aileron servos.
Diode: an electronic device which only allows current to flow one direction. Used to protect radio against power surge and reversed polarity during charging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
DIR-SW: switches that change between the 4 separate directions of snaps available. See SNAP ROLL.
Discharge: to deplete the electrical energy in a battery pack, usually to its lowest safe voltage, for storage or as a part of regular maintenance. See Battery care and charging.
DP16K: see CAMPac.
DSC: direct servo control. Programming and cable combination which allows operation of all receiver channels and functions without the transmitter transmitting. Plugs into trainer port of transmitter and special plug on receiver. Leave power off for both transmitter and receiver. Only the R149DP and R309DPS receivers currently support DSC.
Dual aileron servos: (
ACRO / GLID) a model using 2 servos on 2 separate channels to operate ailerons. May include flaperon action or aileron differential. See Twin aileron servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Dual elevator servos: ( ACRO / GLID) a model using 2 servos on 2 separate channels to operate elevators. Includes elevon,
V-tail, ailevator. See Twin elevator servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Dual rates (
D/R,EXP): reduce/increase the servo travel by flipping a switch (or by stick position). Used to make model more comfortable to fly in different maneuvers. 9C supports triple rates by simply assigning dual rates to 3 position switches. Includes exponential function, see EXP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Elapsed Time Counter reset: see TIMER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
ELE1/2/3/4: designation for the individual servos that are being commanded by the elevator command. Ex: when using elevon, the two wing servos are acting as elevators 1 and 2. See Twin elevator servos.
Elevator: surface which controls the model’s rate of climb or descent. Also called cyclic pitch on helicopters.
Elevator-to-airbrake mix: (
GLID) used to allow the model to loop even tighter on elevator input by having airbrakes work with elevators. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default programming for one curve mix in GLID.
Elevator-to-flap mix: ( ACRO / GLID) Used to apply flaps along with elevators to increase lift, allowing modeler to fly at slower speeds, make tighter loops or turns, etc. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default setting of one mix in
ACRO and GLID.
96
Elevator-to-pitch mix: ( HELI) used to adjust pitch to counter the loss of angle of attack when elevator input is given. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default setting of one mix in HELI.
ELEVON: flying wing configuration with 2 servos working together to create both aileron and elevator action. See Twin
elevator servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Elevons: two surfaces, one on each wing, which work as both ailerons and elevators. See ELEVON.
E
ND
B
UTTON
: control button used during programming to return to previous menu or close menu altogether.
END POINT: often abbreviated EPA. Adjusts the total travel in each direction of proportional servos regardless of their control assignment. Ex: adjustment to
AIL channel will adjust only the servo plugged into channel 1 even if being used as one of two flaperons or elevons. Note: End point is not an absolute; mixing can still drive the servo farther than this setting. . . . . . . . . . .32
Engine cut: see THR-CUT.
EPA: see
END POINT.
Error messages: warnings/cautions provided by the radio when potential problems may exist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Exponential ( D/R,EXP): adjustment to the relationship of S
TICK
M
OVEMENT
to servo movement, typically used to soften overly sensitive models around center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
FailSafe (
F/S): sets servo positions when interference is encountered or signal is lost. Available only in PCM transmission mode. Also includes Battery FailSafe settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
FLAP1/2/3/4: designation for the individual servos that are being commanded by the flap commands. Ex: when acting as flaperons, the two aileron servos are ailerons 1 and 2 and also flaps 1 and 2 (unless you set their values to 0, then they move only as aileron no matter what flap commands are given). See Twin aileron servos and Twin elevator servos.
Flap-to-aileron mix: ( ACRO / GLID) used to create full span flap reaction in flight. Not a preprogrammed mix. See
Programmable mix. This is the default setup of one mix in GLID.
Flap-to-elevator mix: ( ACRO / GLID) used to counteract unwanted changes in pitch when flaps are deployed. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default setup of one mix in
ACRO and GLID.
FLAPERON: one servo on each aileron, plugged into channels 1 and 6, which operate both as ailerons and as flaps. See
Twin aileron servos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
FLAP-TRIM: Adjustment of central position of flaperons, default assigned to C
HANNEL
6 K
NOB
. May also be used as primary or only control of flaperons acting as flaps, or other mixes may be set up. See Twin aileron servos. . . . . . . .46
Frequency: channel on which radio transmits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Frequency band: In the entire spectrum, transmissions are designated in terms of “frequency bands” which exhibit similar properties. In the US, specific frequencies within the 72MHz band are regulated by the FCC to be used solely for remote control aircraft. 50MHz band is available for model use by those holding a HAM amateur radio operator’s license. 75MHz is solely for remote control ground models. 27MHz is legal for air or ground use. To change bands on the 9C, simply purchase and install a module on the proper band. Receiver band MUST be changed by a service center. . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Fuel mixture control: ( ACRO / HELI) see THROTTLE-NEEDLE.
FUNC: function mode of TRAINER, allows student radio to use the computer programming for that channel in the master radio.
Ex: allows a student with a 4-channel transmitter to fly an 8-servo aerobatic plane or a 5-servo helicopter. See
TRAINER.
Gain: the responsiveness or amount of control given the gyro. On a high gain, the gyro is very active and overrides nearly all other actions. Too high a gain may result in “wagging” at the surface as the gyro over-corrects repeatedly in each direction. See
GYRO SENS.
Gear doors: covers for retractable landing gear, may be operated separately from landing gear on some models. . . . .64
GLID: model type, glider. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Governor: electronic device that reads the speed at which the head is spinning, and adjusts the throttle servo to maintain the desired speed.
97
GOVERNOR: (HELI) programming which eases the setup of the GV-1 governor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
GV-1: part number/name for Futaba’s electronic governor. See Gyros and Governors and GOVERNOR for details.
Gyro, gyroscope: equipment that senses change in direction and provides input to compensate for that change. For description of aircraft use, see p. 64. For description of types, and helicopter use, see
GYRO SENS.
GYRO SENS (HELI): gyro sensitivity programming designed to ease the setup and use of gyroscopes on model helicopters.
Manual pages include extensive descriptions of gyro types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Gyros and Governors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Heading-hold gyro: gyro that specifically measures the unwanted deflection angle and compensates until a corresponding angle has been returned. See Gyros and Governors.
HELI: model type, rotary wing. See MODEL TYPE.
Helicopter radio: transmitter that includes helicopter-friendly switch and control layout and sufficient programming to at least support a 5-channel helicopter. The 9CA and 9CH radios both contain all needed programming. The 9CH has a more heli-friendly layout (through switch positioning and no ratchet on throttle for easier hovering)
High band: 72MHz equipment on a channel from 36 to 60. Receiver channel may be changed to any channel within the high band without needing retuning. Transmitter must not be changed except by certified technician. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
High Rate: See D/R,EXP.
Hover: to maintain a stationary position relative to a point on the ground.
HOVERING PITCH: see Hovering setups.
HOVERING THROTTLE: see Hovering setups.
Hovering setups: in-flight adjustments to pitch and throttle curves around center T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
position (the ideal hovering point). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Idle management: varying settings and control of the model’s idle. Ex: using
IDLE-DOWN to lower engine’s idle point for landings and certain maneuvers; using
THR-CUT function to safely and accurately shut the engine off as needed without requiring constant adjustment of throttle trims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
IDLE-DOWN: offset mix that slows the engine’s idle point (decreasing the amount of travel of the throttle servo when at low T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
P
OSITION
). Typically used to keep the model sitting still on the runway prior to take off, for slow aerobatic maneuvers such as spins, and for landings. See Idle management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
IDLE-UP: separate condition created to allow inverted and other types of flight with a helicopter not easily achieved in the normal condition. Note: the idle-ups are activated by activating their throttle curves. Also note that OFFSET is available to create separate trims within each condition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
In-flight needle control: see
THROTTLE-NEEDLE.
INH: makes a feature inactive/unable to be used. When a function is inhibited, it cannot be used even if the assigned switch is ON. Turns off functionality without losing any settings. Only visible in specific features.
Inhibit: see
INH.
Installation: radio installation and setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Inverted: to fly a model upside-down.
Inverted flight control programming: not available in the 9C. Most modelers no longer use this “crutch” to fly inverted, instead learning to recognize the model’s behaviors when inverted and compensate appropriately.
Kill switch: (1) throttle cut switch to close carburetor (see THR-CUT, p. 33). (2) gasoline ignition engine kill switch which removes spark to the plugs to stop the engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Launch setting: (
GLID) see START-OFS.
98
Linear Mix: a mix that maintains the same relationship of master to slave throughout the whole range. Ex: a mix from one flap servo to another flap servo at 100% causes the 2nd servo to follow the first servo’s movement exactly through all points of travel. See Programmable mix.
LINK: mixing function that allows multiple mixes to work in conjunction. See Programmable mix.
Lithium battery: see Backup battery.
Linear: linear, directly proportional. See AIRBRAKE.
Low Band: 72MHz equipment on a channel from 11 to 35. Receiver channel may be changed to any channel within the low band without needing retuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
LOW BATTERY warning: transmitter’s battery is below a safe flight voltage. Recharge immediately. See Error messages.
Low rate: see
D/R, EXP.
MANUAL: controlled by a switch. Ex: see AIRBRAKE.
Master: the primary control. See Programmable mix.
Mechanical gyro: uses a mechanical gyroscope (like a child’s toy gyro) to sense change of angle. See Gyros and
Governors.
MEMORY MODULE INITIALIZE: warning to indicate that the CAMPac installed in the port is not yet formatted or formatted for a different model of transmitter. Pressing the M
ODE BUTTON
initializes the CAMPac, deleting any existing data and formatting the CAMPac for use in the 9C. See Error codes.
MHz: Megahertz. Unit used to express frequency. 72MHz channels are aircraft only frequencies; 75MHz are ground model only frequencies; 27MHz are air and ground both. 50MHz is legal for HAM amateur license holders. See Frequency.
Mix, mixing rate, mix offset, mix links: See Programmable mix.
MIXER ALERT warning: notifies user that a mix is activated which is not considered desirable for engine startup. See
Error messages.
Mode: definition of which channels are assigned to which S
TICK
movements. All 9C radios shipped in the US are Mode
2, with elevator and aileron on the right S
TICK
. To change mode, please visit www.futaba-rc.com.
M
ODE
/P
AGE BUTTON
: control button on radio’s face used in various parts of programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
MODEL COPY: used to duplicate the settings of one model already in memory into a second model memory. Often used to set up 2 similar models, or make a copy of a working model to experiment with new setups. Also used to copy models to/from the CAMpac data storage unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
MODEL NAME: gives each model memory an 8-character name for easy recognition. In MODEL submenu. . . . . . . . . . .27
MODEL RESET: restore all data in a single model memory to defaults, including name and model type. See RESET.
MODEL SELECT: choose the model memory you wish to modify or fly. In MODEL submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
MODEL SELECTION ERROR: the memory last loaded in the transmitter is not currently available (usually because it is on a
CAMPac not currently in the transmitter). See Error messages.
MODEL TYPE: select the type of model the aircraft is, including airplane, 2 glider types, and 5 heli types. . . . . . . . . . . .28
MODUL: modulation, means of transmitting data (PPM, PCM). In PARAMETER submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Module: electronic component which can easily be removed/replaced into the transmitter, which houses all transmission components. Transmission frequency can be safely, legally and easily changed (including from band to band) by changing the module. TP-FM is the standard module, available on any 50MHz or 72MHz frequency. You may also purchase TJ75FM for ground use, 75MHz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Name: see MODEL NAME.
Neckstrap: optional strap to suspend transmitter during use. Futaba stock # FTA8. See Accessories.
99
Ni-Cd: Nickel Cadmium rechargeable battery. Typically used to power transmitter and receiver. See Battery care
and charging.
NiMH: Nickel Metal Hydride rechargeable battery. Newer battery technology than Ni-Cd. Longer run times but more specific peak charging requirements. [Require a (zero) delta peak charger labeled specifically for use with NiMH batteries.]
NORMAL: trainer mode that does not give student radio the computer programming features of the master radio. See Trainer.
NT8S: standard transmitter battery pack. See Accessories.
NULL: not assigned or never changed. Ex: a mix which has a null switch assignment is always active, and can never be changed in flight (turned off) no matter which switch is moved.
OFFSET: (HELI) separate trim settings available to each idle-up (using CONDITION) setting, or assigned to separate switches from the condition switches. When offset is ON, movement of the trim levers adjusts the OFFSET, not the normal condition’s trims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Offset mix: mix that independently moves the slave servo a set percentage of its total throw, not in relation to any master. See Programmable mix.
PA2: Pilot Assist. Optional onboard device that uses optical sensors to correct model’s orientation to upright.
PARAMETER submenu: sets specific parameters. Includes reset, type, modulation, second aileron servo setup, and ATL. . . . .28
PCM: Pulse Code Modulation. An electronically encoded method of transmitting data to a receiver to help minimize the effects of interference. (Transmission is on an FM wavelength, and uses FM crystals, module and trainer cord.). See Modulation.
Peak Charger: charger that automatically stops charging when the battery is fully charged (commonly called “peaked”).
See Battery care and charging.
Piezo gyro: gyro that uses a piezo crystal to sense angular changes. See Gyros and Governors.
Pitch-to-rudder mix: see REVO.
PITCH CURVE: (HELI) curve that sets the response of the collective pitch servo(s) to movement of the throttle/collective
S
TICK
. Independently adjustable in the normal flight mode, one for each of the 3 idle-ups, and one for throttle hold.
Adjusted to provide ideal blade response for various types of maneuvers being performed. For simplicity, the normal condition’s curve may be set in the BASIC menu. All 5 curves are also adjustable in the ADVANCE menu. . . . . . . . . . . .84
PPM: Pulse Position Modulation. Also known as FM. Type of signal transmission. See Modulation.
Programmable mix: used to cause specific servo responses to specific inputs separate from the basic control setups.
Includes extensive definitions of types and examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Range check or test: to test the transmitter’s control over the model at a specific distance as a precaution in checking its proper operation prior to flight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Rate: amount of control given. Ex: see Programmable mix.
RESET: to delete all data in the existing model only. User CANNOT erase all data in the radio. Only service center can
do so. Part of PARAMETER submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Retractable landing gear: landing gear that is brought up into the model during flight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
REVERSE: servo reversing. Used to reverse the direction of a servo to ease installation and set up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Rudder-to-aileron mix: ( ACRO / GLID) used to counteract undesirable roll (roll coupling) that happens with rudder input, especially in knife-edge. Gives proper aileron input to counteract roll coupling when rudder is applied. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default programming for one linear and one curve mix in
ACRO and GLID.
Rudder-to-elevator mix: used to counteract undesirable pitch (pitch coupling) with rudder input, especially in knife edge flight.
Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default programming for one curve mix in ACRO.
100
Rudder-to-throttle mix: ( HELI) adds throttle to counter the added load from increasing pitch of the tail blades, maintaining a constant head-speed with rudder. (This is a minor effect and is not critical in most helicopters.) Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix.
Rx: receiver.
SAFE MODE: feature in snap roll programming that does not allow a snap roll if landing gear is lowered. See Snap roll.
Sailplane: glider, non-powered model aircraft type. See GLID / MODEL TYPE.
S
ELECT
(
CURSOR
)
BUTTONS
: controls used in various ways during programming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Select a model: see MODEL SELECT.
Service Center. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
SERVO: bar graph display on screen to show real time movement/commands sent to servos by transmitter in response to user movements. Also includes a servo test feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Servo reversing: see REVERSE.
Servo Slow: see Channel delay.
Servo testing, servo display: See
SERVO.
SET: to accept. Usually done by pressing and holding the dial when instructed.
Slave: channel that moves in response to the command of the master. See Programmable mix.
Slaving servos: see programmable mix, p. 59.
Slider assignability: sliders on side of radio, known as VR(D) and VR(E) in programming, may be assigned to control channels 5-8 in AUX-CH, used as the primary control of a mix in programmable mixes, etc.
Slow: see Channel delay.
Smoke system: injects a specialized smoke oil into the hot exhaust to create air-show like smoke trails. . . . . . . . . . . .64
SNAP ROLL: (ACRO) combines rudder, elevator and aileron movement to cause the aircraft to snap or spin at the flip of a switch. 9C offers 4 separate snaps with 1 or 2 switches used for selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Speed Flaps: main flaps on a 5-servo glider.
SPEED OFS (GLID): speed run offset programming. Offsets aileron/elevator/rudder settings to provide minimum drag for high speed flight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
START OFS (GLID): start offset programming. Offsets aileron/elevator/rudder settings to provide for maximum lift during launch. . . . . . .71
Stick adjustments: change stick tension and height. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
STk-THR: assigned to T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
. See
AIRBRAKE for example.
SUB-TRIM: used to fine tune the center or neutral point of each servo. Allows full trim function from the trim sliders for flight trimming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
SWASH AFR: (HELI, CCPM types only) adjustment of the travel of all servos involved in the particular control’s movement only during the movement of that control. Ex: reverse the direction of movement of collective pitch while not affecting the direction of movement of either cyclic control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Swashplate type: ( HELI). Part of the model type selection process. Selects specific heli swashplate geometry, such as one of four available types of “CCPM.” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Switch programmability: MOST features are reassignable to a variety of switches, including simply moving an auxiliary control such as flaps from the stock dial to a switch or other location. See AUX-CH.
Synthesized module/receiver: The 9C is compatible with the R309DPS Futaba synthesized receiver that can be used on any 72MHz channel. There is not a synthesized transmitter module that is safe/FCC certified/approved for use with the
9C at the time of this printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
101
Technical Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Thermal hunting setup: using specific programming setups to have the model respond noticeably to the lift of a thermal. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix.
THR-DELAY: (ACRO) throttle delay, slows engine servo response to imitate the spool-up action of a turbine engine. May also be used creatively to create a delayed servo on a different function (see www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.) . . . . . . . .57
THR-REV: reverses the throttle trim function to the top of the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
THROTTLE-NEEDLE: (ACRO / HELI) curve mix that adjusts a second servo, controlling the engine’s mixture, to get optimum
RPM and performance from the engine at all settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Throttle-to-rudder mix: used to compensate with rudder when throttle is applied on take off. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix. This is the default setting of a mix in ACRO and GLID.
THROTTLE CURVE: (HELI) adjusts how the servo responds to the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
position along a 5 point curve. Separate curves available for each idle-up and normal. For simplicity, normal curve may be edited from BASIC menu. All curves may be edited together in the ADVANCE menu. Activating an idle-up’s throttle curve is what activates that idle-up. .81,84
Throttle cut or throttle kill: THR-CUT. (ACRO / HELI) Offset mix which closes the throttle servo to a set position when the assigned switch is moved to shut the engine off without having to fiddle with trim settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
THROTTLE HOLD: (HELI) makes the throttle servo non-responsive to T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
position, and moves the throttle to idle.
Used to practice autorotations. NOTE: THR-HOLD must be activated, then the default pitch curve adjusted properly. . . . . . . . .83
Throttle trim adjustment: see ATL to change throttle trim from “idle only” to full trim control like all other channels. See
THR-REV to reverse T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
completely, including moving trim to the top of the T
HROTTLE
S
TICK
. See also Idle
management for details on idle down and throttle cut functions.
TIMER: adjust the timer functions, used to keep track of flight time on a tank of fuel, etc. The “trigger” to turn timers on/off may be programmed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
TP-FM: single-frequency module. See Module.
TRAINER: software that allows 2 radios to be connected via trainer cord, giving student control of all or some of the channels of the aircraft at the flip of a switch.
FUNC trainer mode allows student to use mixing in the master transmitter, for example dual rates, exponential, fly a 5-channel helicopter with a 4-channel buddy box, etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Trainer box: stripped-down radio system which does not have the ability to transmit, is used only as a student’s radio when instructing while using a trainer cord and the trainer programming.
Trainer cord: cord used to connect two compatible radios to use for flight instruction. See Accessories.
TRIM menu: adjusts rate at which the trim responds to movement of the trim sliders. Also has a reset function to reset the model’s electronic trims to zero. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
TRIM OFFSET: (HELI) sets an offset or adjustment of trim when switching between conditions. See OFFSET.
TRIM option in mixes: ability to adjust the slave servo’s center when the master servo’s center is adjusted using the trim sliders (for example when using two separate flap servos). See Programmable mix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Triple rate: 3rd control travel setting available in flight. See
D/R,EXP.
Twin aileron servos: use of 2 or more servos on separate channels to control aileron action. Includes flaperon, aileron differential, and elevon. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Twin elevator servos: use of 2 or more servos on separate channels to control the elevator of a model. Includes elevon, ailevator, V-tail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Tx: transmitter.
Voltmeter, voltage reading: displays transmitter voltage on home screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
VR(A-E): variable rate controls. Knobs and sliders on the radio. See switch assignment chart for default assignments.
102
VR(A-C) are knobs; VR(D-E) are sliders on the case sides.
V-tail model Mix: ( ACRO / GLID) programming used to control a V-tail model’s tail surfaces, with 2 servos operating 2 control surfaces as both rudder and elevator. See Twin elevator servos.
Warning messages: cautions provided by the radio when certain potential problems exist. See Error messages.
Warranty information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Website: www.futaba-rc.com. Internet location of extensive technical information Futaba products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Whip antenna: aftermarket, shortened antenna. Not approved by Futaba.
103
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
